Grand Vitara 2008

ENGLISH 13.
5 mm
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:
See page 1-1 DOT3 or SAE J1703
Engine oil recommendation: Automatic transmission fluid:

Gasoline engine: SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309
Quality: SG, SH, SJ, SL or SM
Viscosity: SAE 5W-30 Tire cold pressure:
Diesel engine: See the “Tire Information Label” located on the
Synthetic oil, Quality: driver’s door lock pillar.
With DPF®: ACEA C3
Without DPF®: ACEA B4 or C3
Viscosity: SAE 5W-30
GRAND VITARA
For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the

“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Keep With Vehicle At All Times.
99011-78KS0-37E
Contains Important Information

On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.
Part No. 99011-78KS0-37E

June, 2008
Printed in Brazil
Suzuki Red: PANTONE 485

Suzuki Blue: PANTONE 294
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This owner’s manual applies to the GRAND VITARA series.
79K092
NOTE: The illustrated model is one of the GRAND VITARA series.
© COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2008
78KS0-37E

FOREWORD IMPORTANT
This manual should be considered a per- All information in this manual is based WARNING/CAUTION/NOTE
manent part of the vehicle and should on the latest product information avail- Please read this manual and follow its
remain with the vehicle when resold or oth- able at the time of publication. Due to instructions carefully. To emphasize special
erwise transferred to a new owner or oper- improvements or other changes, there information, the symbol and the words
ator. Please read this manual carefully may be discrepancies between informa- WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE have
before operating your new SUZUKI and tion in this manual and your vehicle. special meanings. These special mean-
review the manual from time to time. It con- SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION ings apply except when laws or regulations
tains important information on safety, oper- reserves the right to make production require that the signal words be used with
ation and maintenance. changes at any time, without notice and a different meaning. Pay special attention
without incurring any obligation to to the messages highlighted by these sig-
Your SUZUKI multipurpose vehicle is make the same or similar changes to nal words:
designed and built to be capable of per- vehicles previously built or sold.
forming both on paved road and off road. WARNING
You should therefore remember that your This vehicle may not comply with stan-
vehicle is distinctly different from ordinary dards or regulations of other countries. Indicates a potential hazard that
passenger cars in handling as well as in Before attempting to register this vehi- could result in death or injury.
structure. As with other vehicles of this cle in any other country, check all appli-
type, failure to operate this vehicle cor- cable regulations and make any
necessary modifications. CAUTION
rectly may result in loss of control or an
accident. Be sure to read “on paved road” Indicates a potential hazard that
and “off-road” driving guidelines which fol- could result in vehicle damage.
low. It is very important to familiarize your-
self with the proper operation of this NOTE:
vehicle before you start driving. Indicates special information to make
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.
78KS0-37E

MODIFICATION WARNING
WARNING
Do not modify this vehicle. Modifica-
tion could adversely affect safety,
handling, performance, or durability
and may violate governmental regu-
lations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
75F135
CAUTION
The circle with a slash in this manual
Improper installation of mobile com-
means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-
munication equipment such as cellu-
pen”.
lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)
radios may cause electronic interfer-
ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-
tem, resulting in vehicle performance
problems. Consult your SUZUKI
dealer or qualified service technician
for advice on installing such mobile
communication equipment.
78KS0-37E

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products are a great value
that will give you years of driving pleasure.
This Owner’s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI. In it you will learn
about the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle.
Afterwards, keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference.
Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this Manual with it for the next owner.
In addition to the Owner’s Manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recommend you
read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.
When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership. Their fac-
tory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories.
78KS0-37E

RECOMMENDATION OF GENUINE SUZUKI PARTS AND ACCESSORIES USE
SUZUKI strongly recommends the use of genuine SUZUKI parts* and accessories. Genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories are built to
the highest standards of quality and performance, and are designed to fit your vehicle’s exact specifications.
A wide variety of non-genuine replacement parts and accessories for SUZUKI vehicles are currently available in the market. Using these
parts and accessories can affect the vehicle performance and shorten its useful life. Therefore, installation of non-genuine SUZUKI parts
and accessories is not covered under warranty.
Non-Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

Some parts and accessories may be approved by certain authorities in your country.
Some parts and accessories are sold as SUZUKI authorized replacement parts and accessories. Some genuine SUZUKI parts and
accessories are sold as re-use parts and accessories. These parts and accessories are non-genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories and
use of these parts are not covered under warranty.
Re-use of Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

The resale or re-use of the following items which could give rise to safety hazards for users is expressly forbidden:
• Air bag components and all other pyrotechnic items, including their components (e.g. cushion, control devices and sensors)
• Seat belt system, including their components (e.g. webbing, buckles, and retractors)
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner components contain explosive chemicals. These components should be removed and disposed
of properly by SUZUKI authorized service shop or scrap yard to avoid unintended explosion before scrapping.
*The parts remanufactured under SUZUKI’s approval can be used as genuine SUZUKI parts in Europe.
78KS0-37E

SERVICE STATION GUIDE
1. Fuel (see section 1)
2. Engine hood (see section 5)
3. Tire changing tools (see section 8)
4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow>
1
(see section 7) 9 (RHD)
5. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
<Red> (see section 7)
6. Engine coolant (see section 7)
7. Windshield washer fluid 8 (RHD) 2 (RHD)
(see section 7)
6
8. Battery (see section 7)
9. Tire pressure (see tire information 5 (4A/T) 10
2
label on driver’s door lock pillar) 4 5 (5A/T)
10. Spare tire (see section 8)
7 8 (LHD) 2 (LHD) 3
9 (LHD)
78K032
LHD: Left Hand Drive

RHD: Right Hand Drive
NOTE: The illustration is 5 DOOR model.
78KS0-37E

MEMO
78KS0-37E

TABLE OF CONTENTS FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1
BEFORE DRIVING 2
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3
DRIVING TIPS 4
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7
EMERGENCY SERVICE 8
APPEARANCE CARE 9
GENERAL INFORMATION 10
SPECIFICATIONS 11
INDEX 12
78KS0-37E

ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXTERIOR EXAMPLE
1. Rear Window Wiper (P.2-68)
2. Engine Hood (P.5-50)
3. Windshield Wiper (P.2-66) 1 2 3 4 5
4. Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors
(if equipped) (P.5-66)
5. Radio Antenna (P.5-8)
6. Spare Wheel (P.8-3)
7. Tailgate (P.2-4)
8. Fuel Filler Cap (P.5-49)
9. Outside Rearview Mirror (P.2-14)
10. Door Locks (P.2-2)
6 7 8 9 10
78K064
78KS0-37E

INTERIOR EXAMPLE
1. Interior Light (P.5-51, P.7-35) 1 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8
2. Seat Belts (P.2-22)
3. Coat hooks (if equipped) (P.5-58)
4. Side Curtain Air Bags (if equipped)
(P.2-40)
5. Sun Visor (P.5-51)
6. Eyeglasses Holder (if equipped)
(P.5-58)
7. Spot Light (P.5-53, P.7-35)
8. Inside Rearview Mirror (P.2-13)
9. Luggage Compartment Cover
(P.5-62)
10. Armrest (if equipped) (P.5-61)
11. Rear Seats (P.2-18)
12. Side Air Bags (if equipped) (P.2-40)
13. Parking Brake Lever (P.3-7)
14. Front Seats (P.2-15)
15. Gearshift Lever (P.3-12)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
78K067
78KS0-37E

INSTRUMENT PANEL EXAMPLE

1. Electric Window Controls 12 3 4 5 6 7 4 1
2. Electric Mirror Control (if equipped)
(P.2-14)
3. Remote Audio Controls (if equipped)
(P.5-26, P.5-47)
4. Front Air Bags (P.2-38)
5. Cruise Control (if equipped) (P.3-29)
6. Hazard Warning Switch (P.2-66)
7. Heating and Air Conditioning System
(P.5-1)
8. Fuel Lid Opener Lever (P.5-49)
9. Cigarette Lighter (if equipped)
(P.5-54)
10. Power Mode Selector Switch
(if equipped) (P.3-13, P.3-16)
11. Front Seat Heater (if equipped)
(P.2-17)
12. Accessory Socket (if equipped)
(P.5-53)
8 9 10 11 12
78K065
78KS0-37E

INSTRUMENT PANEL EXAMPLE 1 2 3 4

1. Lighting Control Lever (P.2-63)/
Turn Signal Control Lever (P.2-65)
2. Instrument Cluster (P.2-44)
3. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever
(P.2-66)/Rear Window Wiper and
Washer Switch (P.2-68)
4. Heated Rear Window and Heated
Outside Rearview Mirrors Switch
5. Headlight Leveling Switch
(if equipped) (P.2-64)/
Headlight Washer Switch
6. Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)
(P.2-64)
7. Engine Hood Release Handle
(P.5-50)
8. Horn (P.2-69)
9. Ignition Switch (P.3-3)
10. Transfer Switch (if equipped) (P.3-18)
11. “ESP OFF” Switch (if equipped)
(P.3-35)/Hill descent cntrol Switch
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
78K066
78KS0-37E

MEMO
78KS0-37E

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1
Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1
65D394
78KS0-37E

Fuel Recommendation: 1, 2
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Fuel Recommendation Gasoline/Ethanol blends Diesel Engine

Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol
If your vehicle is equipped with the die-
Gasoline Engine (grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are
sel particulate filter (DPF®):
commercially available in some areas.
Blends of this type may be used in your The diesel fuel should be with Cetane
EXAMPLE Index higher than 50 and sulfur content
vehicle if they are no more than 10% etha-
nol. Make sure this gasoline-ethanol blend less than 50 ppm (parts per million). You
has octane ratings no lower than those should use the diesel fuel conformable to
recommended for gasoline. EN590 that corresponded to Euro IV emis-
sion control. Do not use marine diesel fuel,
Gasoline/Methanol blends heating oils and so forth. If you use
Blends of unleaded gasoline and methanol improper diesel fuel, it may cause serious
(wood alcohol) are also commercially avail- engine damage.
able in some areas. DO NOT USE fuels
containing more than 5% methanol under If your vehicle is not equipped with
any circumstances. Fuel system damage DPF®:
or vehicle performance problems resulting The diesel fuel should be with Cetane
64J020 from the use of such fuels are not the Index higher than 50 and sulfur content
responsibility of SUZUKI and may not be less than 350 ppm (parts per million). You
If your vehicle is not fitted with a restrictor should use the diesel fuel conformable to
in the fuel filler pipe and a label covered under the New Vehicle Warranty.
Fuels containing 5% or less methanol may EN590 that corresponded to Euro III emis-
“UNLEADED FUEL ONLY” is not attached sion control. Do not use marine diesel fuel,
on the fuel filler lid, then you may use be suitable for use in your vehicle if they
contain cosolvents and corrosion inhibi- heating oils and so forth. If you use
leaded or unleaded gasoline with an improper diesel fuel, it may cause serious
octane number (RON) of 91 or higher. tors.
engine damage.
Note, it is preferable to use unleaded gaso-
line. NOTE: For detail of DPF®, refer to “Diesel Particu-
If you are not satisfied with the driveability late Filter (DPF®)” in the “OPERATING
If a label “UNLEADED FUEL ONLY” is or fuel economy of your vehicle when you YOUR VEHICLE” section.
attached on the fuel filler lid regardless of a are using a gasoline/alcohol blend, you
restrictor in the fuel filler pipe, you must should switch back to unleaded gasoline
use unleaded gasoline with an octane containing no alcohol.
number (RON) of 91 or higher (or RON of
95 or higher if it is stated on the fuel filler
lid).
1-1
78KS0-37E

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
CAUTION
The fuel tank has an air space to
allow for fuel expansion in hot
weather. If you continue to add fuel
after the filler nozzle has automati-
cally shut off or an initial blowback
occurs, the air chamber will become
full. Exposure to heat when fully
fuelled in this manner will result in
leakage due to fuel expansion. To
prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
after the filler nozzle has automati-
cally shut off, or when using an alter-
native non automatic system, initial
vent blowback occurs.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill fuel containing
alcohol while refueling. If fuel spilled
on the vehicle body, wipe it up imme-
diately. Fuels containing alcohol can
cause paint damage, which is not
covered under the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
1-2
78KS0-37E

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
MEMO
1-3
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
BEFORE DRIVING
Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1
Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-2 2
Keyless Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry
System Transmitter ............................................................. 2-5
Theft Deterrent Light ........................................................... 2-11
Windows .............................................................................. 2-12
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-13
Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-15
Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-18
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-22
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags)
(if equipped) ......................................................................... 2-36
Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-44
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-45
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-54
Tachometer (if equipped) ................................................... 2-54
60G404
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-54
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-55
Illumination Control ............................................................ 2-55
Information Display (if equipped) ...................................... 2-56
Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-63
Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-64
Headlight Leveling Switch (if equipped) ........................... 2-64
Head Light Washer Switch (if equipped) .......................... 2-65
Turn Signal Control Lever .................................................. 2-65
Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-66
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-66
Tilt Steering Lock Lever (if equipped) ............................... 2-68
Horn ...................................................................................... 2-69
Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview
Mirrors (if equipped) Switch ............................................... 2-69
78KS0-37E

Fuel Recommendation: 1, 2
BEFORE DRIVING
Keys Immobilizer System (if equipped) ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the
This system is designed to help prevent engine will not start.
vehicle theft by electronically disabling the
EXAMPLE engine starting system. NOTE:
The engine can be started only with your If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to
vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key the “LOCK” position, then turn it back to
which has an electronic identification code the “ON” position. If the light still blinks with
programmed into it. The key communi- the ignition switch turned to the “ON” posi-
cates the identification code to the vehicle tion, there may be something wrong with
when the key is turned to the “ON” posi- your key or with the immobilizer system.
tion. If you need to make spare keys, see Ask your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the
your SUZUKI dealer. The vehicle must be system.
programmed with the correct identification
code for the spare keys. A key made by an NOTE:
ordinary locksmith will not work. • If you lose your immobilizer ignition key,
62J098
see your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-
For gasoline engine model sible to have the lost one deactivated,
Your vehicle comes with a pair of identical then have the new key made by them.
keys. Keep the spare key in a safe place. • If you own other vehicles with immobi-
One key can open all of the locks on the lizer keys, keep those keys away from
vehicle. the ignition switch when using your
The key identification number is stamped SUZUKI, or the engine may not be
on a metal tag provided with the keys or on started because they may interfere with
the keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in a your SUZUKI’s immobilizer system.
54G003 • In case of attaching any metal objects to
safe place. If you lose your keys, you will
need this number to have new keys made. For diesel engine model the immobilizer key, it may not start the
Write the number below for your future ref- engine.
erence.
KEY NUMBER:
(2)
64J255
If the immobilizer system light (1) or the

injection warning light (2) blinks when the
2-1
78KS0-37E

Keys: 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Door Locks
CAUTION
The immobilizer key is a sensitive
Side Door Locks UNLOCK LOCK
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-

aging the immobilizer key:
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois- UNLOCK
ture or high temperature such as
on the dashboard under direct sun-
light. LOCK
• Keep the immobilizer key away Rear
from magnetic objects.
This immobilizer system, model

“5WK49182” for gasoline engine or 64J002
“IMB413-01” for diesel engine is in compli- Front
ance with the essential requirements and To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn
other provisions of the Directive 1999/5/ the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob
60B008 rearward to unlock the door.
EC.
To lock a front door from outside the vehi-
cle: • For 5 door model
Ignition Key Reminder (if equipped) To lock a rear side door from outside the
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind • Insert the key and turn the top of the key
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and
toward the front of the vehicle, or close the door. You do not need to pull
ignition switch when the driver’s door is • Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and
opened. and hold the door handle as you close
hold the door handle as you close the the door.
door.
To unlock a front door from outside the

vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of
the key toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s specification,
some vehicles do not have a keylock on
the front passenger’s door.
2-2
78KS0-37E

Spare Tire Nut Lock: 5
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Central Door Locking System passenger’s door lock) and turn the top of
(if equipped) the key toward the rear of the vehicle twice. EXAMPLE
To unlock the driver’s door (or the front
passenger’s door) only, insert the key in
UNLOCK that door lock and turn the top of the key
toward the rear of the vehicle once.
LOCK
NOTE: UNLOCK LOCK
Rear
Depending on the vehicle’s specification,
single unlock type is featured. With this
feature, you can lock and unlock all doors
simultaneously by turning the key once.
Front 79K005
You can also lock or unlock all doors by

64J003 depressing the front or rear of the switch,
You can lock and unlock all doors (includ- respectively.
ing the tailgate) simultaneously by using
the key in the driver’s door lock. NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-
NOTE: less entry system, you can also lock or
Depending on the vehicle’s specification, unlock all doors by operating the remote
you can lock and unlock all doors simulta- controller/transmitter. Refer to “Keyless
neously by using the key in the front pas- Start System Remote Controller/Key-
senger’s door lock. less Entry System Transmitter” in this
section.
To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the • If your vehicle is equipped with the key-
key in the driver’s door lock (or the front less start system, you can also lock or
passenger’s door lock) and turn the top of unlock all doors by pushing the request
the key toward the front of the vehicle switch on the door handle. Refer to “Key-
once. less Start System Remote Controller/
Keyless Entry System Transmitter” in
To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert this section.
the key in the driver’s door lock (or the front
2-3
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Child-Proof Locks Tailgate If you can not unlock the tailgate due to a
You can lock or unlock the tailgate by using discharged battery or malfunction, follow
the key in the driver’s door lock. the procedures below to unlock the tailgate
from inside the vehicle.
UNLOCK 1) Remove the luggage compartment
(2)
cover.
2) Fold the rear seat forward for easier
access. Refer to the “Folding Rear
Seats” section for details on how to fold
(1) LOCK the rear seat forward.
79K009
EXAMPLE
Each of the rear doors is equipped with a
64J010
child-proof lock which can be used to help
prevent unwanted opening of the door from If your vehicle is equipped with a tailgate
inside the vehicle. When the lock lever is in keylock, you can lock or unlock the tailgate (1)
the “LOCK” position (1), the rear door can by using the key in the tailgate lock.
only be opened from outside. When the
lock lever is in the “UNLOCK” position (2), NOTE:
the rear door can be opened from inside or When, in parked condition on a road, the
64J202
outside. tailgate is open and hides the lights, it is
necessary to indicate the presence of the 3) Remove the cap (1) by hand.
WARNING vehicle, for example by means of a warn- 4) Break the vinyl using a jack handle or a
ing triangle or other devices according to flat blade screw driver to access the
Be sure to place the child-proof lock national requirements for use on the road. emergency lever (2).
in the “LOCK” position whenever
children are seated in the rear.
2-4
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Keyless Start System Remote Keyless Start System Remote

Controller (Type A)
Controller/Keyless Entry The remote controller enables the following
System Transmitter operations:
(2) • You can lock or unlock the doors by
operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons
Type A Type B on the remote controller. Refer to the
explanation in this section.
• You can lock or unlock the doors (includ-
ing the tailgate) by pushing the request
switch on the door handle of each door
or the tailgate. For details, refer to the
explanation in this section.
• You can start the engine without using
64J203 an ignition key. For details, refer to “Igni-
5) Push down on the emergency lever (2) tion Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR
using a jack handle or a flat blade screw VEHICLE” section.
driver. To lock the tailgate, push up on
the emergency lever (2). 63J254
Your vehicle is equipped with either a key- (2)

WARNING less start system remote controller (Type
A) or a keyless entry system transmitter (1)
To avoid injury, do not use your fin-
ger to push the emergency lever. (Type B). The remote controller has a key-
less entry system and a keyless start sys-
After using the emergency lever, be sure to tem. The transmitter has only a keyless
see your SUZUKI dealer. entry system. For details, refer to the fol-
lowing explanations.
62J010
(1) “LOCK” button

(2) “UNLOCK” button
2-5
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
You can lock or unlock all doors (including roundings, especially near other trans- ing the request switch (1) on the door han-
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating mitting devices such as radio towers or dle of each door or the tailgate.
the remote controller near the vehicle. CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.
• The door locks can not be operated with To lock all doors when all doors are
• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but- the remote controller if the ignition switch unlocked, push the request switch on one
ton (1) once. is in a position other than “LOCK”, or the of the door handle once.
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the ignition key is inserted in the ignition
“UNLOCK” button (2) once. The turn signal lights will flash once when
switch, or if any door is open. the doors are locked.
• To unlock other doors, wait a second or • If you lose one of the remote controllers,
two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2) ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos- To unlock a door or all doors:
a second time. If you “double-click” too sible for a replacement. Be sure to have • Push the request switch on the door
fast, the doors will not unlock. your dealer program the new remote handle once to unlock only one door.
The turn signal lights will flash once when controller code in your vehicle’s memory • Push the request switch on the door
the doors are locked. so that the old code is erased. handle twice to unlock all doors.
When the doors are unlocked: When the doors are unlocked:
Keyless unlocking/locking using the • The turn signal lights will flash twice.
• The turn signal lights will flash twice. request switches
• If the interior light switch is in the • If the interior light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the interior light will “DOOR” position, the interior light will
turn on for about 15 seconds and then EXAMPLE turn on for about 15 seconds and then
fade out. If you push in the ignition fade out. If you push in the ignition
switch or insert the key during this time, switch or insert the key during this time,
the light will start to fade out immedi- the light will start to fade out immedi-
ately. ately.
Be sure the doors are locked after you Be sure the doors are locked after you
operate the “LOCK” button (1). operate the request switch to lock the
doors.
If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is NOTE:
operated, the doors will automatically lock (1)
• The door locks can not be operated by
(1)
again. the request switch under the following
79K007
conditions:
NOTE: – If any door is open or is not completely
• The maximum operating distance of the When the remote controller is within the closed.
remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.), operating range described in this section, – If the ignition switch is in a position
but this can vary depending on the sur- you can lock or unlock the doors by push- other than “LOCK”.
2-6
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
– If the ignition key is inserted in the igni- ating range may be reduced or the certain operating conditions such as the
tion switch. remote controller may be inoperative. following:
• If no doors are opened within about 30 • If the remote controller is too close to the • When there are strong signals coming
seconds after unlocking the doors by door, the request switches may not oper- from a television, power station or a cel-
pushing the request switch, the doors ate. lular phone.
will be locked again automatically. • If a spare remote controller is in the vehi- • When the remote controller is in contact
cle, the request switches may not oper- with or covered by a metal object.
EXAMPLE ate normally. • When a radio wave type remote keyless
• The remote controller will only operate a entry is used nearby.
(1)
request switch if it is within the switch’s • When the remote controller is placed
operating range. For example, if the near an electronic device such as per-
remote controller is within the operating sonal computer.
range of the driver’s door request switch Some additional precautions you should
but not the front passenger’s door take and information you should be aware
(1) request switch or the tailgate request of are:
switch, the driver’s door switch can be • Make sure the ignition key is stowed in
operated but the front passenger’s door the remote controller. If the remote con-
(1) switch or tailgate switch can not be oper- troller becomes unreliable, you will not
ated. be able to lock or unlock the doors or
start the engine.
78K001 CAUTION • Be sure that the driver always carries the
(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) remote controller.
The remote controller is a sensitive • If you lose one of the remote controllers,
electronic instrument. To avoid dam- ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-
When the remote controller is within aging the remote controller:
approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a sible for a replacement. Be sure to have
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois- your dealer program the new remote
front door handle or the tailgate switch, you ture or high temperature such as by
can lock or unlock the doors by pushing controller code in your vehicle’s memory
leaving it on the dashboard under so that the old code is erased.
the request switch. direct sunlight.
NOTE: • You can use up to four remote controllers
• Keep the remote controller away and ignition keys for your vehicle. Ask
• If the remote controller is outside the from magnetic objects such as a
request switch operating range your SUZUKI dealer for details.
television. • The battery life of the remote controller
described above, you will not be able to
operate the request switch. is about two years, but it can vary
NOTE: depending on usage conditions.
• If the battery of the remote controller The keyless start system may not function
runs down or there are strong radio correctly in certain environments or under
waves or noise, the request switch oper-
2-7
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Reminder function • If you open the driver’s door and lock the
door by turning the lock knob forward or
pushing the power door locking switch,
the driver’s door will be automatically
unlocked.
• If you open a door other than the driver’s
door and lock the front passenger’s door
63J281 by turning the lock knob forward or push-
ing the power door locking switch, the
To stow the ignition key into the remote front passenger’s door will be automati-
controller, push the key in the remote con- cally unlocked.
troller until you hear a click.
NOTE:
• The reminder will not operate when the
EXAMPLE remote controller is on the instrument
78K027 panel, in the glove box, in a storage
If the remote controller is not in the vehicle compartment, in the sun visor or on the
(A) under the following conditions, a buzzer floor etc.
sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds • Be sure that the driver always carries the
63J282
and the keyless start system indicator light remote controller.
To remove the key from the remote control- on the instrument cluster blinks in red: • Do not leave the remote controller in the
ler, push the button (A) in the direction of • When the vehicle speed is over 10 km/h vehicle when leaving the vehicle.
the arrow and pull the key out from the (6 mph).
remote controller. • When one or more doors are opened
and all of the doors are later closed with
the ignition switch in a position other
than “LOCK”.
The red indicator light will turn off within
several seconds after the remote controller
is returned to an area of the vehicle other
than the rear luggage area.
If the remote controller is left in the vehicle
and you lock the driver’s door or front pas-
senger’s door as described below, the door
will be automatically unlocked.
2-8
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Replacement of the battery

If the remote controller becomes unreli- CAUTION
able, replace the battery.
The remote controller is a sensitive
To replace the battery of the remote con- electronic instrument. To avoid dam-
troller: aging it, do not expose it to dust or
moisture or tamper with internal
parts.
(1)
Type A
The Keyless Start System, controller
model S62J1 and key model TS001 are in
compliance with the essential require-
ments and other provisions of Directive
62J012 1999/5/EC.
2) Replace the battery (1) (Lithium disc
type CR2032 or equivalent) so its + ter-
minal faces the bottom of the case as
shown in the illustration.
62J011 3) Close the remote controller firmly.
4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-
1) Insert a flat blade screw driver covered ated with the remote controller.
with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote 5) Dispose of the used battery properly
controller and pry it open. according to applicable rules or regula-
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-
ies with ordinary household trash.
WARNING
Swallowing a lithium battery may
cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.
2-9
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Keyless Entry System Transmitter When the doors are unlocked:

(Type B) • The turn signal lights will flash twice. CAUTION
• If the interior light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the interior light will The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
turn on for about 15 seconds and then tronic instrument. To avoid damaging
fade out. If you insert the key into the the transmitter:
ignition switch during this time, the light • Do not expose it to impacts, mois-
will start to fade out immediately. ture or high temperature such as by
leaving it on the dashboard under
Be sure the doors are locked after you direct sunlight.
operate the “LOCK” button (1). • Keep the transmitter away from
magnetic objects such as a televi-
If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
(1) sion.
onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is
(2) operated, the doors will automatically lock
again. Replacement of the Battery
If the transmitter becomes unreliable,
81A184 NOTE: replace the battery.
(1) “LOCK” button • The maximum operating distance of the To replace the battery of the transmitter:
(2) “UNLOCK” button keyless entry system transmitter is about
5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending
You can lock or unlock all doors (including on the surroundings, especially near
the taildate) simultaneously by operating other transmitting devices such as radio (1)
the transmitter near the vehicle. towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.
• The door locks can not be operated with
• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but- (2)
the transmitter if the ignition switch is in a
ton (1) once. position other than “LOCK”, or the igni-
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the tion key is inserted in the ignition switch,
“UNLOCK” button (2) once. or if any door is open.
• To unlock other doors, wait a second or • If you lose one of the transmitters, ask
two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2) your SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible
a second time. If you “double-click” too for a replacement. Be sure to have your
fast, the doors will not unlock. dealer program the new transmitter code
The turn signal lights will flash once when in your vehicle’s memory so that the old 81A185
the doors are locked. code is erased.
1) Remove the screw (1), and open the
transmitter cover.
2-10
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
2) Remove the transmitter (2). Theft Deterrent Light

WARNING
Swallowing a lithium battery may EXAMPLE
cause serious internal injury. Do not
(2) allow anyone to swallow a lithium
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.
(3) CAUTION
The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
tronic instrument. To avoid damaging
it, do not expose it to dust or mois-
81A186 ture or tamper with internal parts.
78K013
3) Put the edge of a coin or a flat blade
Type B This light will blink with the ignition switch
screw driver in the slot of the transmitter
The Keyless Entry System, Transmitter in the “OFF” or “ACC” position. The blink-
(2) and pry it open.
model TS002 and Receiver model R62J1 ing light is intended to deter theft by lead-
4) Replace the battery (3) (Lithium disc-
or R51K0 are in compliance with the ing others to believe that the vehicle is
type CR1620 or equivalent) so its + ter-
essential requirements and other provi- equipped with a security system.
minal faces the “+” mark of the transmit-
ter. sions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
5) Close the transmitter and install it into
the transmitter holder.
6) Close the transmitter cover, install and
tighten the screw (1).
7) Make sure the door locks can be oper-
ated with the transmitter.
8) Dispose of the used battery properly
according to applicable rules or regula-
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-
ies with ordinary household trash.
2-11
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Windows Passenger’s door
Electric Window Controls EXAMPLE CLOSE

(3)
(if equipped)
The electric windows can only be operated
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
Driver’s side OPEN

EXAMPLE
(1)
(4) 81A009
64J012
(2) To open a window, push the top part of the
The passenger’s door has a switch (3) to
switch and to close the window lift up the
operate the passenger’s window.
top part of the switch.
(5) The driver’s window has an “auto-down”
feature for added convenience (at toll
booths or drive-through restaurants, for
example). This means you can open the
79K010 window without holding the window switch
The driver’s door has a switch (1) to oper- in the “Down” position. Press the driver’s
ate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) to window switch completely down and
operate the front passenger’s window or release it. To stop the window before it
there are switches (4), (5), to operate the reaches the bottom, pull the switch up
rear left and right passenger windows, briefly.
respectively.
2-12
78KS0-37E

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8
Windows: 3, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Lock switch Mirrors

WARNING
EXAMPLE Inside Rearview Mirror
• You should always lock the passen-
ger’s window operation when there
are children in the vehicle. Children
can be seriously injured if they get
part of their body caught by the
window during operation.
• To avoid injuring an occupant by
window entrapment, be sure no
part of the occupant’s body such
as hands or head is in the path of
the electric windows when closing
them. Day driving Night driving
79K012 • Always remove the ignition key (1)
The driver’s door also has a lock switch for when leaving the vehicle even if a
the passenger’s window(s). When you short time. Also do not leave chil- 78K033
push in the lock switch, the passenger’s dren alone in a parked vehicle.
window(s) can not be raised or lowered by Unattended children could use the You can adjust the inside rearview mirror
operating either of the switches (2), (3), (4) electric window switches and get by hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-
or (5). To restore normal operation, release trapped by the window. cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set
the lock switch by pushing again. the selector tab (1) to the day position,
NOTE: then move the mirror up, down or sideways
If you drive with one of the rear windows by hand to obtain the best view.
open, you may hear a loud sound caused When driving at night, you can move the
by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open selector tab to the night position to reduce
the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or glare from the headlights of vehicles
narrow the rear window opening. behind you.
2-13
78KS0-37E

Windows: 3, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Outside Rearview Mirrors Electric Mirrors (if equipped)

WARNING
• Always adjust the mirror with the
selector set to the day position.
• Only use the night position if it is
necessary to reduce glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you.
Be aware that in this position you (1)
may not be able to see some
objects that could be seen in the (1)
(2) (3)
day position. (2) (3)
(4)
(4)
64J014 64J015
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you The switch to control the electric mirrors is
can just see the side of your vehicle in the located on the driver’s door panel. You can
mirrors. adjust the mirrors when the ignition switch
is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. To adjust
WARNING the mirrors:
Be careful when judging the size or 1) Move the selector switch to the left or
distance of a vehicle or other object right to select the mirror you wish to
seen in the side convex mirror. Be adjust.
aware that objects look smaller and 2) Press the outer part of the switch that
appear farther away than when seen corresponds to the direction in which
in a flat mirror. you wish to move the mirror.
3) Return the selector switch to the center
position to help prevent unintended
adjustment.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the heated
outside rearview mirrors, refer to “Heated
Rear Window and Heated Outside Rear-
2-14
78KS0-37E

Windows: 3, 8
Mirrors: 3, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
view Mirrors (if equipped) Switch” in this Front Seats Adjusting Seat Position
section.
Seat Adjustment
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s
seat or seatback while driving. The
seat or seatback could move unex-
pectedly, causing loss of control.
Make sure that the driver’s seat and
seatback are properly adjusted
before you start driving.
WARNING
64J016
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
The adjustment lever for each front seat is
which reduces the effectiveness of
located under the front of the seat. To
the seat belts as a safety device,
adjust the seat position, pull up on the
make sure that the seats are adjusted
adjustment lever and slide the seat forward
before the seat belts are fastened.
or rearward. After adjustment, try to move
the seat forward and rearward to ensure
that it is securely latched.
2-15
78KS0-37E

Mirrors: 3, 8
BEFORE DRIVING
Adjusting Seatbacks Adjustable Head Restraints

(if equipped)
WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an
upright position when driving, or seat
belt effectiveness may be reduced.
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-
mum protection when seatbacks are
in the upright position.
78K034
If the driver’s seat is equipped with a seat

height adjuster lever on the outboard side 63J256
of the seat, raise or lower the seat by pull- Head restraints are designed to help
ing up or down the adjuster lever. reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case
of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to
the position which places the center of the
head restraint closest to the top of your
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high
64J018 as possible.
To adjust the seatback angle of front seat,
pull up the lever on the outboard side of WARNING
the seat, move the seatback to the desired • Never drive the vehicle with the
position, and release the lever to lock the head restraints removed.
seatback in place. • Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.
2-16
78KS0-37E

Seat Adjustment: 3
BEFORE DRIVING
Front Seat Heater (if equipped)

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
78K035 79K036
78K018
To raise the front head restraint, pull To reinstall the head restraint, insert the
upward on the restraint until it clicks. To head restraint bars into the holes (2) and With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
lower the restraint, push down on the push the head restraint down. tion, push in one or both of the seat heater
restraint while holding in the release knob switches to warm the corresponding
(1). If a head restraint must be removed seat(s). The indicator light below the switch
(for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in will also come on. To turn off the seat
the release knob and pull the head heater, push in the switch again. The indi-
restraint all the way out. cator light below the switch will go off.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to recline the seat-
back to provide enough overhead clear-
ance to remove the head restraint.
2-17
78KS0-37E

Seat Adjustment: 3
BEFORE DRIVING
Rear Seats
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heater ele-
Seat Adjustment
ment:
• Do not subject the front seats to WARNING
heavy impacts, such as children To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
jumping on them. which reduces the effectiveness of
• Do not cover the seat with any the seat belts as a safety device,
insulating materials such as blan- make sure that the seats are adjusted
kets or cushions. before the seat belts are fastened.
Adjusting Seatbacks
86G064 WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an
WARNING upright position when driving, or seat
belt effectiveness may be reduced.
Improperly using the seat heater can
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-
be hazardous. An occupant can suf-
mum protection when seatbacks are
fer burns even if the heating tempera-
in the upright position.
ture is fairly low, if the occupant is
wearing thin pants, a thin skirt or
shorts and leaves the heater on for
long periods.
Avoid using the seat heater for these
occupants:
• People who have reduced feeling in
their legs, including the elderly or
those with certain disabilities.
• Small children, or anyone with sen-
sitive skin.
• People who are asleep or under the
influence of alcohol or other drugs
which make them tired.
2-18
78KS0-37E

Seat Adjustment: 3
Adjustable Head Restraints: 3
BEFORE DRIVING
Adjustable Head Restraints

(if equipped) EXAMPLE
Head restraints are designed to help
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case
of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to
the position which places the center of the
head restraint closest to the top of your
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high
as possible.
WARNING
• Never drive the vehicle with the
64J019 head restraints removed. 64J023
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
To adjust the seatback angle of the rear restraint while driving. To raise the rear head restraint, pull
seats: upward on the restraint until it clicks. To
1) Pull up the lever on the top of a split lower the restraint, push down on the
NOTE:
folding seat. restraint while holding in the release knob.
It may be necessary to recline the seat-
2) Move the seatback to one of the lock If a head restraint must be removed (for
back to provide enough overhead clear-
positions. The number of the lock posi- cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in the
ance to remove the head restraint.
tions depends on the vehicle specifica- release knob and pull the head restraint all
tion. the way out.
3) Release the lever to lock the seatback
in position. After adjustment, try moving When installing a child restraint system,
the seatback to make sure it is securely raise the head restraint to the most upper
locked. position.
2-19
78KS0-37E

Adjustable Head Restraints: 3
BEFORE DRIVING
Folding Rear Seats 3) Lower the adjustable head restraint

The rear seat(s) of your vehicle can be fully.
folded forward to provide additional cargo
space.
To fold the rear seats forward: (1)
1) Remove the luggage compartment
cover.
64J088
5) Pull the lock release strap (1) rearward

64J087
to unlatch the seat cushion.
4) Pull the release lever forward on the top
of each split seat, and fold the seat- WARNING
backs forward.
When you unlatch the rear seat cush-
ion, be careful that your face or
64J086 CAUTION hands are not injured from the seat
2) Stow the seat belt buckles of the center Make sure the belt webbing is not popping up.
and left seating position into the pocket caught by the seat.
of the seat cushion as shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION
When you fold the rear seatback for-
ward, stow the seat belt buckles of
the center and left seating position
into the pocket first. This helps pre-
vent being caught by the seat and
being damaged.
2-20
78KS0-37E

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Luggage or other cargo should be
stowed in the luggage compartment
with the rear seat in an upright posi-
tion, whenever possible. If you need
to carry cargo in the passenger com-
partment with the rear seat back
folded forward, be sure to secure the
cargo or it may be thrown about,
causing injury. Never pile cargo
(4) higher than the seatbacks.
64J089 66J196 To return the seat to the normal position,

follow the procedure below.
6) Fold the entire seat forward. 8) Hook the strap (4) to the front seat head
restraint and re-tighten the adjuster to
apply a tension on the strap as shown
in the illustration.
(2)
CAUTION
When securing the folded rear seat
with a strap, adjust the strap length
so that the rear seat will not move.
(3)
64J175
66J195
1) Unhook the strap from the head
7) Push down the adjuster (2) to make the restraint and stow the strap to the back
strap slack, and then unhook the strap of the seat cushion as shown in the
by pushing down the hook (3). illustration. Make sure to adjust the
strap length to avoid any slack or twist.
2-21
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Seat Belts and Child Restraint

CAUTION
Systems
• When returning the rear seat cush-
ion to the normal position, make
sure that there is nothing around
the striker. Any foreign materials
prevent the seat cushion from
being locked securely.
• When returning the rear seat cush-
ion to the normal position, make
sure that there is nothing under the
seat cushion. This prevents dam-
age to the seat cushion.
64J091
2) Pull down the seat cushion until it locks

into place.
65D231S
WARNING
WARNING
When returning the rear seat cushion
to the normal position, be careful that Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.
your finger is not caught between the
lock and the floor.
WARNING
An air bag supplements, or adds to,
the frontal crash protection offered
by seat belts. The driver and all pas-
64J092 sengers must be properly restrained
by wearing seat belts at all times,
3) Raise the seatback until it locks into
whether or not an air bag is mounted
place.
at their seating position, to minimize
After returning the seat, try moving the the risk of severe injury or death in
seat and seatback to make sure they are the event of a crash.
securely latched.
2-22
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
as low as possible
across the hips
Above the pelvis Across the pelvis
65D606 65D201 65D199
WARNING WARNING WARNING

• Never allow persons to ride in the (Continued) (Continued)
cargo area of a vehicle. In the event • Seat belts should never be worn • Pregnant women should use seat
of an accident, there is a much with the straps twisted and should belts, although specific recommen-
greater risk of injury for persons be adjusted as tightly as is com- dations about driving should be
who are not riding in a seat with fortable to provide the protection made by the woman’s medical advi-
their seat belt securely fastened. for which they have been designed. sor. Remember that the lap portion
• Seat belts should always be A slack belt will provide less proof the belt should be worn as low
adjusted as follows: tection than one which is snug. as possible across the hips, as
– the lap portion of the belt should • Make sure that each seat belt shown in the diagram.
be worn low across the pelvis, buckle is inserted into the proper • Do not wear your seat belt over
not across the waist. buckle catch. It is possible to cross hard or breakable objects in your
– the shoulder straps should be the buckles in the rear seat. pockets or on your clothing. If an
worn on the outside shoulder (Continued) accident occurs, objects such as
only, and never under the arm. glasses, pens, etc. under the seat
– the shoulder straps should be belt can cause injury.
away from your face and neck, (Continued)
but not falling off your shoulder.
(Continued)
2-23
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Lap-Shoulder Belt
WARNING WARNING Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
(Continued) (Continued) The lap-shoulder belt has an emergency
• Never use the same seat belt on • Avoid contamination of seat belt locking retractor (ELR), which is designed
more than one occupant and never webbing by polishes, oils, chemi- to lock the seat belt only during a sudden
attach a seat belt over an infant or cals, and particularly battery acid. stop or impact. It also may lock if you pull
child being held on an occupant’s Cleaning may safely be carried out the belt across your body very quickly. If
lap. Such seat belt use could cause using mild soap and water. this happens, let the belt go back to unlock
serious injury in the event of an • For children, if the shoulder belt it, then pull the belt across your body more
accident. irritates the neck or face, move the slowly.
• Periodically inspect seat belt child closer to the center of the
assemblies for excessive wear and vehicle. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
damage. Seat belts should be • All seatbacks should always be in The rear outboard lap-shoulder belts have
replaced if webbing becomes an upright position when driving, emergency locking retractors (ELRs) that
frayed, contaminated, or damaged or seat belt effectiveness may be can be temporarily converted to function
in any way. It is essential to replace reduced. Seat belts are designed to as automatic locking retractors (ALRs).
the entire seat belt assembly after it offer maximum protection when The ALR mode should be used if you need
has been worn in a severe impact, seatbacks are in the upright posi- to secure a child restraint system in the
even if damage to the assembly is tion. seat. Refer to the “Child Restraint Sys-
not obvious. tems” in this section for details.
• Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in the rear
seat.
• Infants and small children should
never be transported unless they
are properly restrained. Restraint
systems for infants and small chil-
dren can be purchased locally and
should be used. Make sure that the
system you purchase meets appli-
cable safety standards. Read and
follow all the directions provided by
the manufacturer.
(Continued)
2-24
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Safety reminder by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt

upward through the latch plate. The length
Sit up straight and of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself
fully back to allow freedom of movement.
Low on hips
60A036
60A038
To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and
well back in the seat, pull the latch plate
attached to the seat belt across your body
and press it into the buckle until you hear a
Low on hips
“click”.
60A040
To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt

during a collision, position the lap portion
of the belt across your lap as low on your
hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit
2-25
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
60A039 64J024
78K028
To unfasten the belt, push the red NOTE:
“PRESS” button on the buckle and allow To identify the rear center lap-shoulder belt When the driver doesn’t buckle his or her
the belt to retract. buckle “CENTER”, is molded on the seat belt with the ignition switch in the “ON”
buckle. The buckles are designed so a position, the driver’s seat belt reminder
latch plate can not be inserted into the light in the instrument cluster will blink until
wrong buckle. the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
WARNING
It is absolutely essential that the
driver and passengers wear their seat
belts at all times. Persons who are
not wearing seat belts have a much
greater risk of injury if an accident
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-
ling your seat belt before putting the
key in the ignition.
2-26
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster Seat Belt Inspection Child Restraint Systems
(if equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
65D209S 60G332S
64J198 Periodically inspect the seat belts to make Infant restraint - rear seat only
Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that sure they work properly and are not dam-
the shoulder belt rides on the center of the aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch
outside shoulder. To upward, slide the plates, retractors, anchorages, and guide
anchor up. To downward, slide the anchor loops. Replace any seat belts which do not
down while pulling the lock knob out. After work properly or are damaged.
adjustment, make sure that the anchor is
securely locked. WARNING
Be sure to inspect all seat belt
WARNING assemblies after any collision. Any
Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi- seat belt assembly which was in use
tioned on the center of the outside during a collision (other than a very
shoulder. The belt should be away minor one) should be replaced, even
from your face and neck, but not fall- if damage to the assembly is not
ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment obvious. Any seat belt assembly 65D584
of the belt could reduce the effective- which was not in use during a colli-
ness of the safety belt in a crash. sion should be replaced if it does not
function properly or is damaged in
any way.
2-27
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Child restraint SUZUKI highly recommends that you use

a child restraint system to restrain infants
EXAMPLE and small children. Many different types of
child restraint systems are available; make
sure that the restraint system you select
meets applicable safety standards.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by either seat
belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-
shoulder belts) or by ISO-FIX type anchor-
age (if equipped). Whenever possible,
SUZUKI recommends that child restraint
systems be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children 65D607
65D197 are safer when properly restrained in rear
Booster seat seating positions than in front seating posi-
tions. WARNING
EXAMPLE If your vehicle is equipped with a
If you must use a front-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the front passenger air bag, do not install
passenger’s seat as far back as possible. a rear-facing child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the passen-
NOTE: ger’s air bag inflates, a child in a rear-
Observe any statutory regulation about facing child restraint could be killed
child restraints. or seriously injured. The back of a
rear-facing child restraint would be
too close to the inflating air bag.
65D203
2-28
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat

WARNING Belts
Children could be endangered in a NOTE:
crash if their child restraints are not There are two types of lap-shoulder belts
properly secured in the vehicle. depending on the vehicle’s specification,
When installing a child restraint sys- A-ELR (Automatic-Emergency Locking
tem, be sure to follow the instruc- Retractor) type and ELR (Emergency
tions below. Be sure to secure the Locking Retractor) type.
child in the restraint system accord- The A-ELR type belts have emergency
ing to the manufacturer’s instruc- locking retractors (ELRs) that can be tem-
tions. porarily converted to function as automatic
locking retractors (ALRs).
The ELR type belts have ELRs that can
WARNING not be converted to function as ALRs.
65D608
In an accident or sudden stop, the
rear seat armrest (if equipped) could To identify the belt is the A-ELR type or the
fall forward. If there is a child in a ELR type, slowly pull all of the shoulder
rear-facing child restraint in the cen- webbing out of the retractor. Then let the
ter seating position, the falling arm- webbing retract a little and pull it out, and
rest could injure the child. Make sure repeat this a few times. If the belt is locked
the armrest is back in the seat and each time you pull the belt, the belt is the
locked when not in use. A-ELR type. If the belt is not locked, the
belt is the ELR type.
Mostly, rear outboard lap-shoulder belts
are the A-ELR type.
Please note that the methods to secure the
child restraint system with the ELR lap-
shoulder belt and with the A-ELR lap-
65D609
shoulder belt are different.
2-29
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
A-ELR type belt A-ELR type

CAUTION
EXAMPLE
Before installing a child restraint sys- EXAMPLE
tem in the rear seat, raise the head
restraint to the most upper position.
ELR type belt
EXAMPLE
83E035
83E031
1) Slowly pull all of the remaining webbing
Install your child restraint system accord-
out of the retractor. You may hear a
ing to the instructions provided by the child
click, which means that the emergency
restraint system manufacturer.
locking retractor (ELR) has converted to
Make sure that the seat belt is securely function as an automatic locking retrac-
latched. tor (ALR).
65D233
After making sure that the seat belt is
Install your child restraint system accord- securely latched:
ing to the instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
Make sure that the seat belt is securely
latched.
Try to move the child restraint system in all
directions, to make sure it is securely
installed.
2-30
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
A-ELR type A-ELR type A-ELR type

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
83E032 83E036 65D234
2) Allow the extra webbing to retract, and 3) Make sure that the retractor has con- A-ELR type
pull the webbing toward the retractor to verted to the ALR mode by trying to pull
take up any slack. Make sure that the webbing out of the retractor. If the EXAMPLE
lap portion of the belt is tight around the retractor is in the ALR mode, the belt
child restraint system and the shoulder will be locked.
portion of the belt is positioned so that it
Pull to tighten
can not interfere with the child’s head or WARNING
neck.
If the retractor is not in the ALR
mode, the child restraint system can
move or tip over when your vehicle
turns or stops abruptly.
65D235
4) Try moving the child restraint system in

all directions, to make sure it is securely
installed. If you need to tighten the belt,
pull more webbing toward the retractor.
2-31
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
A-ELR type (to revert from ALR to ELR) Installation with ISO-FIX Type Install a ISO-FIX type child restraint sys-
Anchorages (if equipped) tem according to the instructions provided
EXAMPLE by the child restraint system manufacturer.
After installing the child restraint system,
try moving it in all directions especially for-
ward, to make sure the connecting bars
are securely latched to the anchorages.
65D267
When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow 64J027

it to retract to a certain length, the retractor
will automatically revert back to the normal Your vehicle is equipped with the lower
ELR mode. anchorages in the rear seat outboard seat-
ing positions for securing an ISO-FIX type
of child restraints with the connecting bars.
64J135
The lower anchorages are located where
the rear of the seat cushion meets the bot- Your vehicle is also equipped with the top
tom of the seatback. strap anchorages. (For details, refer to
“Installation of Child Restraint with Top
WARNING Strap”.) Be sure to use the top strap of the
child restraint according to the instructions
Be sure to install the ISO-FIX type of provided by the child restraint system man-
child restraint(s) in the only outboard ufacturer.
seating positions, not in the central
position for rear seat.
2-32
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Here is a general installation:

1) Pull upward on the rear head restraint EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
to the most upper position.
CAUTION
Before installing a child restraint sys-
tem in the rear seat, raise the head
restraint to the most upper position.
2) If possible, fold the seatback rearward

for easier installation.
EXAMPLE
54G183 54G184
4) Use your hands to carefully align the 5) Push the child restraint toward the
connecting bar tips with the anchor- anchorages so that the connecting bar
ages. Take care not to pinch your fin- tips are partially hooked to the anchor-
gers. ages. Use your hands to confirm the
position.
78F114
3) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,

inserting the connecting bars to the
anchorages between the seat cushion
and the seatback.
2-33
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Installation of Child Restraint with directly behind the child restraint. Do

EXAMPLE Top Strap (if equipped) not attach the top strap to the luggage
restraint loops (if equipped).
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Front
Do not attach the child restraint top
strap to the luggage restraint loops
(if equipped). Incorrectly attached top
strap will reduce the intended effec-
tiveness of the child restraint system.
Type 1
54G185
6) Grasp the front of the child restraint and

push the child restraint forcefully to 79K026
latch the connecting bars. Make sure Some child restraint systems require the
they are securely latched by trying to use of a top strap. Top strap anchor brack-
move the child restraint system in all ets are located on the back of the rear seat
directions, especially forward. as shown in the illustration. The number of
7) Return the seatback if folded. the anchor bracket provided in your vehicle
8) Attach the top tether strap referring to depends on the vehicle specification. Type 2
“Installation of Child Restraint with Top Install the child restraint system as follows:
Strap” section below. 1) Remove the luggage compartment
cover.
2) Secure the child restraint on the rear
seat using the procedure described
above for securing a restraint system
that does not require a top strap.
3) Hook the top strap to the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap
86G032
according to the instructions provided
by the child restraint system manufac- 4) When routing the top strap, be sure to
turer. Be sure to attach the top strap to pass the top strap as shown in the illus-
the corresponding anchor located tration. (Refer to “Adjustable Head
2-34
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Restraints” section for details on how to Seat Belt Pretensioner System Read this section and the “Supplemental
raise or lower the head restraint.) (if equipped) Restraint System (air bags)” section to
5) Make sure that cargo does not interfere learn more about the pretensioner system.
with routing of the top strap.
and/or The seat belt pretensioner system works
with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
WARNING SYSTEM (Air Bags). The crash sensors
Child restraint anchorages are and the electronic controller of the air bag
designed to withstand only those system also control the seat belt preten-
loads imposed by correctly fitted sioners. When the air bags are triggered,
child restraints. Under no circum- the pretensioners are also triggered. For
stances are they to be used for adult precautions and general information
seat belts or harnesses or for attach- including servicing the pretensioner sys-
ing other items or equipment to the tem, refer to the “Supplemental Restraint
vehicle. Label System (air bags)” section in addition to
this “Seat Belt Pretensioner System” sec-
tion, and follow all those precautions.
63J269
The pretensioner is located in each front
WARNING seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-
ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-
This section of the owner’s manual pant’s body more snugly in the event of a
describes your SUZUKI’s SEAT BELT frontal crash. The retractors will remain
PRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Please locked after the pretensioners are acti-
read and follow ALL these instruc- vated. Upon activation, some noise will
tions carefully to minimize your risk occur and some smoke may be released.
of severe injury or death. These conditions are not harmful and do
not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
To determine if your vehicle is equipped The driver and all passengers must be
with a seat belt pretensioner system at the properly restrained by wearing seat belts
front seating positions, check the label on at all times, whether or not a pretensioner
the front seat belt at the bottom part. If the is equipped at their seating position, to
letters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illus- minimize the risk of severe injury or death
trated, your vehicle is equipped with the in the event of a crash.
seat belt pretensioner system. You can use Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do
the pretensioner seat belts in the same not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the
manner as ordinary seat belts.
2-35
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn Service on or around the pretensioner sys- Supplemental Restraint
low across the pelvis, not across the waist. tem components or wiring must be per-
Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” sec- formed only by an authorized SUZUKI System (air bags)
tion and the instructions and precautions dealer who is specially trained. Improper (if equipped)
about the seat belts in this “Seat Belts and service could result in unintended activa-
Child Restraint Systems” section for details tion of pretensioners or could render the
on proper seat and seat belt adjustments. pretensioner inoperative. Either of these
WARNING
two conditions may result in personal This section of the owner’s manual
Please note that the pretensioners along injury. describes the protection provided by
with the air bags will activate only in severe
your SUZUKI’s SUPPLEMENTAL
frontal collisions. They are not designed to To prevent damage or unintended activa-
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).
activate in rear impacts, side impacts, roll- tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-
Please read and follow ALL these
overs, or minor frontal collisions. The pre- tery is disconnected and the ignition switch
instructions carefully to minimize
tensioners can be activated only once. If has been in the “LOCK” position for at least
your risk of severe injury or death in
the pretensioners are activated (that is, if 90 seconds before performing any electri-
the event of a collision.
the air bags are activated), have the pre- cal service work on your SUZUKI.
tensioner system serviced by an autho-
Do not touch pretensioner system compo-
rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.
nents or wiring. The wires are wrapped
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the
cluster does not blink or come on briefly couplers are yellow. When scrapping your
when the ignition switch is turned to the SUZUKI, ask your SUZUKI dealer, body
“ON” position, stays on for more than 10 repair shop, or scrap yard for assistance.
seconds, or comes on while driving, the
pretensioner system or the air bag system
may not work properly. Have both systems
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer
as soon as possible.
2-36
78KS0-37E

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12
BEFORE DRIVING
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-

EXAMPLE mental Restraint System consisting of the
4 following components in addition to a lap-
shoulder belt at each seating position.
1. Driver’s front air bag module

2. Front passenger’s front air bag mod-
7 ule
1
3. Side air bag module (if equipped)
2 4. Side curtain air bag module
3
(if equipped)
8 5
5. Seat belt pretensioners
6. Air bag controller
6 7. Forward crash sensor
8. Side crash sensor (if equipped)
3
8
63J030
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument

cluster does not blink when the ignition
switch is first turned to the “ON” position,
or the “AIR BAG” light stays on, or comes
64J031 on while driving, the air bag system (or the
seat belt pretensioner system (if
equipped)) may not work properly. Have
the air bag system inspected by an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.
2-37
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Front Air Bags dashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are Front air bags will not inflate
molded into the air bag covers to identify
EXAMPLE the location of the air bags.
Frontal collision range
65D236
63J259
Front air bags will probably not inflate
EXAMPLE
60G032
Front air bags are designed to inflate only

in severe frontal collisions.
64J032 65D237
The driver’s front air bag is located behind Front air bags are not designed to inflate in
the center pad of the steering wheel and rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or
the front passenger’s front air bag is minor frontal collisions, since they would
located behind the passenger’s side of the offer no protection in those types of acci-
2-38
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
dents. Remember, since an air bag Air bag symbol

deploys only one time during an accident,
seat belts are needed to restrain occu- EXAMPLE
pants from further movements during the
WARNING AVERTISSEMENT
accident. ADVERTENCIA WARNUNG
ATTENZIONE WAARSCHUWING
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute VIGYÁZAT
for seat belts. To maximize your protection, GB
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be
aware that no system can prevent all pos- F
sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

E
WARNING
D
An air bag supplements, or adds to,
the crash protection offered by seat 65D607
I
belts. The driver and all passengers
must be properly restrained by wear- WARNING NL
ing seat belts at all times, whether or

not an air bag is mounted at their Do not install a rear-facing child H
seating position, to minimize the risk restraint in the front passenger’s

of severe injury or death in the event seat. If the passenger’s front air bag
of a crash. inflates, a child in a rear-facing child
restraint could be killed or severely DO NOT place rear-facing child seat
injured. The back of a rear-facing on this seat with airbag.
child restraint would be too close to DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY can
the inflating air bag. occur.
The BACK SEAT with child restraint
is the SAFEST place for children.
If you must use a front-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat, be sure to 73K021
move the front passenger’s seat as far
back as possible. Please refer to the “Seat You may find this label on the sun visor.
Belts and Child Restraint Systems” section
in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
details on securing your child.
2-39
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air molded into the side air bag cover to iden- Side collision range
Bags (if equipped) tify the location of the side air bags.
EXAMPLE WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag, do not install a child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the
passenger’s side air bag inflates, a
child in a child restraint could be
injured.
64J036
78K036 Side air bags and side curtain air bags are
designed to inflate only in severe side
impact collisions.
64J034
Side curtain air bags (if equipped) are

located in the roof lining. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” are molded into the pillar to iden-
tify the location of the side curtain air bags.
78K037 NOTE:
Side air bags (if equipped) are located in • Side curtain air bag provides a cushion
the part of the front seatbacks closest to for the front passenger and the rear pas-
the doors. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are senger.
2-40
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Side air bags and side curtain air bags lisions, rollovers or minor side collisions, How the system works
will not inflate since they would offer no protection in In a frontal collision, the crash sensors will
those types of accidents. Only the side air detect rapid deceleration and send a signal
bag and side curtain air bag on the side of to the controller. If the controller judges
the vehicle that is struck will inflate. that the deceleration represents a severe
Remember, since an air bag deploys only frontal crash, the controller will trigger the
one time during an accident, seat belts are inflators. If your vehicle is equipped with
needed to restrain occupants from further side air bags and side curtain air bags,
movements during the accident. crash sensors will detect a side collision,
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute and if the controller judges that the side
for seat belts. To maximize your protection, collision is severe enough, it will trigger the
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be side air bag and side curtain air bag infla-
aware that no system can prevent all pos- tors.
sible injuries that may occur in an accident. The inflators inflate the appropriate air
bags with nitrogen or argon gas. The
inflated air bags provide a cushion for your
54G027 WARNING head (front air bags and side curtain air
Side air bags and side curtain air bags An air bag supplements, or adds to, bags only) and upper body. The air bag
will probably not inflate the crash protection offered by seat inflates and deflates so quickly that you
belts. The driver and all passengers may not even realize that it has activated.
must be properly restrained by wear- The air bag will neither hinder your view
ing seat belts at all times, whether or nor make it harder to exit the vehicle.
not an air bag is mounted at their Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully
seating position, to minimize the risk in order to reduce the chance of serious or
of severe injury or death in the event fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable
of a crash. consequence of the quick inflation is that
the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as
the facial area against a front air bag. Also,
upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and
some powder and smoke will be released.
These conditions are not harmful and do
not indicate a fire in the car. Be aware,
54G028
however, that some air bag components
Side air bags and side curtain air bags are may be hot for a while after inflation.
not designed to inflate in frontal or rear col-
2-41
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
A seat belt helps keep you in the proper

position for maximum protection when an WARNING
air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far
back as possible while still maintaining • The driver should not lean over the
control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your steering wheel. The front passen-
seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the ger should not rest his or her body
steering wheel or dashboard. Front occu- against the dashboard, or other-
pants should not lean on or sleep against wise get too close to the dash-
the door. Please refer to the “Seat Adjust- board. For vehicles with side air
ment” section and the “Seat Belts and bags and side curtain air bags,
Child Restraint Systems” section in the occupants should not lean on or
“BEFORE DRIVING” section for details on sleep against the door. In these sit-
proper seat and seat belt adjustments. uations, the out-of-position occu-
pant would be too close to an
65D610
inflating air bag, and may suffer
severe injury.
• Do not attach any objects to, or
place any objects over, the steering
wheel or dashboard. Do not place
any objects between the air bag
and the driver or front passenger.
These objects may interfere with air
bag operation or may be propelled
by the air bag in the event of a
crash. Either of these conditions
may cause severe injury.
(Continued)
54G582
2-42
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Servicing the air bag system Scrapping a car that has an uninflated air
WARNING If the air bags inflate, have the air bags and bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,
related components replaced by an autho- body repair shop or scrap yard for help
(Continued) rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible. with disposal.
• For vehicles with side air bags, do
not place seat covers on the front If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and
seats, because seat covers could the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag
restrict the air bag’s inflation. Also, controller could be damaged. If this hap-
do not place any cup holders or pens, have the air bag system inspected
other objects on the door, as these by the SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.
objects could be propelled by the Special procedures are required for servic-
air bag in the event of a crash. ing or replacing an air bag. For that reason,
Either of these conditions may only an authorized SUZUKI dealer should
cause severe injury. be allowed to service or replace your air
bags. Please remind anyone who services
Note that even though your vehicle may be your SUZUKI that it has air bags.
moderately damaged in a collision, the col-
lision may not have been severe enough to Service on or around air bag components
trigger the front, side, or side curtain air or wiring must be performed only by an
bags to inflate. If your car sustains ANY authorized SUZUKI dealer. Improper ser-
front-end or side damage, have the air bag vice could result in unintended air bag
system inspected by an authorized deployment or could render the air bag
SUZUKI dealer to ensure it is in proper inoperative. Either of these two conditions
working order. may result in severe injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic To prevent damage or unintended inflation
module which records information about of the air bag system, be sure the battery
the air bag system if the air bags deploy in is disconnected and the ignition switch has
a crash. The module records information been in the “LOCK” position for at least 90
about overall system status, which sensors seconds before performing any electrical
activated the deployment. service work on your SUZUKI. Do not
touch air bag system components or wires.
The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or
yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow
for easy identification.
2-43
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Instrument Cluster
1. Speedometer EXAMPLE
2. Tachometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Temperature gauge
5. Information display
2 1 3
6. MODE/ILL knob
7. TRIP knob
8. Warning and indicator lights
8 7 5 6 8 4
78K090
2-44
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and Indicator Lights the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens, NOTE:
you should: Because the disc brake system is self-
Brake System Warning Light 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
adjusting, the fluid level will drop as the
brake pads become worn. Replenishing
the brake fluid reservoir is considered nor-
WARNING mal periodic maintenance.
Remember that stopping distance
may be longer, you may have to push Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
harder on the pedal, and the pedal Warning Light
may go down farther than normal.
65D477
For working check of this light, there are 2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and
following three different type operations stopping at the side of the road.
depending on the vehicle’s specification. – If you determine that it is safe, drive
carefully at low speed to the nearest
1) The light comes on briefly when the dealer for repairs, or
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” – Have the vehicle towed to the nearest 65D529
and/or “START” position. dealer for repairs.
2) The light comes on when the parking When the ignition switch is turned to the
brake is engaged with the ignition “ON” position, the light comes on briefly so
WARNING you can check that the light is working.
switch in the “ON” position.
3) The light comes on when under either If any of the following conditions If the light stays on, or comes on when
or both of above two conditions. occur, you should immediately ask driving, there may be something wrong
your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the with the ABS.
The light also comes on when the fluid in brake system.
the brake fluid reservoir falls below the If this happens:
• If the brake system warning light 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
specified level. does not go out after the engine 2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” and
The light should go out after starting the has been started and the parking then start the engine again.
engine and fully releasing the parking brake has been fully released.
brake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid res- • If the brake system warning light If the warning light comes on briefly then
ervoir is adequate. does not come on when the igni- turns off, the system is normal. If the warn-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” or ing light still stays on, the system will be
If the brake system warning light comes on “START” position. something wrong.
while you are driving the vehicle, it may • If the brake system warning light
mean that there is something wrong with If the light and the brake system warning
comes on at any time during vehi- light stay on, or come on simultaneously
cle operation. when driving, your ABS system is
2-45
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
equipped with the rear brake force control When the ignition switch is turned to the “ESP” (Electronic Stability
function (Proportioning valve function) and “ON” position, the light comes on briefly so Program) Warning Light
there may be something wrong with both you can check that the light is working. If (if equipped)
the rear brake force control function and the light stays on, or comes on when driv-
anti-lock function of the ABS system. ing and remains on, there may be some-
If one of these happens, have the system thing wrong with the ESP® systems (other
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. than ABS). You should have the system
If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
system will function as an ordinary brake dealer.
system that does not have this ABS sys-
tem. NOTE: 66J031
When you disconnect and re-connect the
For details of the ABS system, refer to
battery, ESP® system functions other than When the ignition switch is turned to the
“Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” in the “ON” position, the light comes on briefly so
ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. you can check that the light is working. If
tor light will blink 1 time per second. For
details on how to reactivate the ESP® sys- the light stays on, or comes on when driv-
SLIP Indicator Light (if equipped) tems, refer to “SLIP Indicator Light” in the ing, there may be something wrong with
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. the ESP® systems (other than ABS). You
should have the system inspected by an
For details of the ESP® systems, refer to authorized SUZUKI dealer.
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in For details of the ESP® systems, refer to
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec- “Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in
tion. the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-
tion.
79K019 WARNING
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler The ESP® systems cannot prevent NOTE:
AG. accidents. Always drive carefully. The information display shows the warning
and indicator message when this light
comes on.
This light blinks 5 times per second when
one of the following systems is activated.
• Stability control system
• Traction control system
• Hill descent control system (if equipped)
If this light blinks, drive carefully.
2-46
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light systems (other than ABS) will turn on • The transfer switch is in the “4H” or “N”
(if equipped) automatically and the light will go out. position
• If your vehicle is equipped with a hill • The gearshift lever is in the “P” position
descent control system and a hill hold • The gearshift lever is moved to the “N”
control system, these systems will not be position while driving
turned off when the “ESP OFF” switch is • The vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (15
pushed to turn off the ESP® systems. mph)
For details of the ESP® systems, refer to NOTE:

66J032
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in If the hill descent control indicator does not
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec- come on when you push the hill descent
When the ignition switch is turned to the tion. control switch, there may be a problem
“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so with the hill descent control system and/or
you can check that the light is working. Hill descent control Indicator Light the ESP® system. Have your vehicle
When the “ESP OFF” switch is pushed to inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
turn off the ESP® systems (other than dealer.
ABS), the “ESP OFF” light comes on and
stays on. For details of the hill descent control sys-
tem, refer to “Hill descent control System”
NOTE: in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-
• If the vehicle speed is greater than tion.
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), the 79K050
ESP® systems (other than ABS) will turn When the ignition switch is turned to the
on automatically and the light will go out. “ON” position, this light comes on briefly so
• When the transfer switch (if equipped) is you can check that the light is working.
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the
ESP® systems (other than ABS) will be When the hill descent control system is
canceled automatically. The light will activated, the hill descent control indicator
come on and stay on. comes on.
• If the ESP® systems operate continu-
ously such as when driving on slippery NOTE:
roads, the traction control functions of If any of the following conditions occur
the ESP® systems may be canceled when the hill descent control system is
temporarily to avoid overheating the activated, the hill descent control indicator
brake pads, and the light will come on. blinks.
After a short period of time, the ESP®
2-47
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Oil Pressure Light Charging Light For details about the seat belt reminder,
refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint
Systems” in this section.
“AIR BAG” Light (if equipped)
50G051 50G052
This light comes on when the ignition This light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and switch is turned to the “ON” position, and
goes out when the engine is started. The goes out when the engine is started. The
63J030
light will come on and remain on if there is light will come on and remain on if there is
insufficient oil pressure. If the light comes something wrong with the battery charging This light blinks or comes on for several
on when driving, pull off the road as soon system. If the light comes on when the seconds when the ignition switch is turned
as you can and stop the engine. engine is running, the charging system to the “ON” position so you can check if the
Check the oil level and add oil if necessary. should be inspected immediately by your light is working.
If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys- SUZUKI dealer.
tem should be inspected by your SUZUKI The light will come on and stay on if there
dealer before you drive the vehicle again. is a problem in the air bag system or the
Seat Belt Reminder Light
seat belt pretensioner system (if
(if equipped)
equipped).
CAUTION
• If you operate the engine with this WARNING
light on, severe engine damage can
result. If the “AIR BAG” light does not blink
• Do not rely on the Oil Pressure or come on briefly when the ignition
Light to indicate the need to add switch is turned to the “ON” position,
oil. Be sure to periodically check stays on for more than 10 seconds,
the engine oil level. 60G049 or comes on while driving, the air bag
system or the seat belt pretensioner
If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled when
system (if equipped) may not work
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
properly. Have both systems
position, this light will come on and/or
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
blink.
dealer.
2-48
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Malfunction Indicator Light Low Fuel Warning Light

CAUTION
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
the malfunction indicator light is on
can cause permanent damage to the
vehicle’s emission control system,
and can affect fuel economy and
driveability.
65D530 54G343
Your vehicle has a computer-controlled Immobilizer System Light If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank
emission control system. A malfunction (if equipped) immediately.
indicator light is provided on the instrument
panel to indicate when it is necessary to NOTE:
have the emission control system serviced. The activation point of this light varies
The malfunction indicator light comes on depending on road conditions (for exam-
when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” or ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions
or “START” and goes out when the engine because of fuel moving in the tank.
is started.
If the malfunction indicator light comes on 64J256
NOTE:
when the engine is running, there is a The information display shows the warning
problem with the emission control system. When the ignition switch is turned to the and indicator message when this light
Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer to “ON” position, this light comes on to let you comes on.
have the problem corrected. know the light is working. If this light blinks
with the ignition switch turned to “ON”, the
For Diesel Engine Model engine will not start.
If this light blinks when the engine is run-
ning, reduce the engine speed until the NOTE:
light stops blinking. If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to
Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer as the “LOCK” position, then turn it back to
soon as possible. the “ON” position. If the light still blinks with
the ignition switch turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, there may be something wrong with
the immobilizer system. Ask your SUZUKI
dealer to inspect the system.
2-49
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Glow Plug Indicator Light Red Stop Warning Light Fuel Filter Warning Light
(For Diesel Engine Model) (For Diesel Engine Model) (For Diesel Engine Model)
60A543 81A207 60A541
If the coolant temperature is cool enough, This light comes on for several seconds This light comes on for several seconds
this light comes on when the ignition switch when the ignition switch is turned to the when the ignition switch is turned to the
is turned on and goes out when the glow “ON” position so you can check the light is “ON” position so you can check the light is
plug is heated enough for engine starting. working. working.
If this light comes on when driving, it indi- If the light comes on when driving, there is
Injection Warning Light cates that the engine is overheating. Fol- a possibility to have water in the fuel filter.
(For Diesel Engine Model) low the instructions for engine overheating Drain water as soon as possible. For
in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section. details of draining water, refer to “Fuel Fil-
ter” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-
If this light comes on and the engine is NANCE” section.
automatically turned off, it indicates that
the injection system has a fault. Bring the
vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer as soon as
possible.
81A208
This light comes on for several seconds

when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position so you can check the light is
working.
If this light comes on when driving, there is
a fault in the injection system, or the DPF®
is clogged. Ask your SUZUKI dealer to
have the system inspected.
2-50
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®) Open Door Warning Light “SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)
Warning Light (For Diesel Engine
Model) (if equipped)
54G391 65D474
This light remains on until all doors are When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by
64J244 completely closed. the cruise control system, this light will be
This light comes on for several seconds on.
when the ignition switch is turned to the NOTE:
“ON” position so you can check the light is The information display shows the warning “POWER” Indicator Light
working. and indicator message when this light (if equipped)
comes on.
If the light comes on when driving, the
DPF® is nearly clogged. To regenerate the “CRUISE” Indicator Light
DPF®, you must drive the vehicle until the
light goes out, at a speed of 75 km/h (47
(if equipped)
mph) or higher for a while (max. 30 min-
utes).
If you drive your vehicle until the light goes 60A297
out, the regeneration of the DPF® will be
completed. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position with the power mode selec-
For details of DPF®, refer to “Diesel Partic- tor switch in the “OFF” position, this indica-
ulate Filter (DPF®)” in the “OPERATING 52D113
tor comes on briefly to let you know the
YOUR VEHICLE” section. When the cruise control system is on, this light is working. When the power mode
light will be on. selector switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion with the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, this indicator comes on and
remains on.
2-51
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Transmission Warning Light tem. Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI Turn Signal Indicators
(if equipped) dealer to have the problem corrected.
Keyless Start System Indicator

Light (if equipped)
50G055
81A262
When you turn on the left or right turn sig-
This light comes on for several seconds nals, the corresponding green arrow on the
when the ignition switch is turned to the instrument panel will flash along with the
62J041 respective turn signal lights. When you
“ON” position so you can check the light is
working. If this light blinks, there is the When you push the ignition switch for vehi- turn on the hazard warning switch, both
problem with the transmission system. Ask cle with the keyless start system, this light arrows will flash along with all of the turn
your SUZUKI dealer to have the system will come on in blue or red. If this light signal lights.
inspected. comes on in blue, you can turn the ignition
switch without using an ignition key. If this Main Beam (high beam) Indicator
Automatic Headlight Leveling light comes on in red, you can not turn the Light
System Warning Light (if equipped) ignition switch without using an ignition
key. For details, refer to “Ignition Switch” in
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-
tion.
If this light blinks in red, it reminds you that
the remote controller is not in the vehicle.
For details, refer to “Keyless Start System
Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System 50G056
64J046 Transmitter” in this section. This indicator comes on when headlight
When the ignition switch is turned to the main beams (high beams) are turned on.
“ON” position, this light comes on briefly to
let you know the light is working.
If this light comes on, there is a problem
with the automatic headlight leveling sys-
2-52
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Illumination Indicator Light (1): Neutral Master Warning Indicator Light

(2): 4-wheel drive high range center differ-
ential lock mode
(2) & (3): 4-wheel drive low range center
differential lock mode
No indicators: 4-wheel drive high range
64J045 mode 78K049
This indicator light comes on while the For details, refer to “Using the Transfer When the information display shows warn-
parking lights, tail lights and/or the head- Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI- ing and indicator messages, this indicator
lights are on. CLE” section. light may also come on or blink.
If the indicators (all lights) continue to blink, For details, refer to “Information Display” in
4WD Mode Indicator Lights this section.
(if equipped) there is a problem in the transfer system
and you should have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.
NOTE:
The information display shows the warning
and indicator message when the transfer
system is operated, or has a problem.
(1) (2) (3)
64J044
These indicators show the 4WD operating

mode as described below. When the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position,
these lights come on briefly to let you know
that the lights are working.
2-53
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Speedometer Tachometer (if equipped) Fuel Gauge

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(2)
(1)
78K038 78K039 64J052
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed The tachometer indicates engine speed in This gauge gives an approximate indica-
in km/h and/or mph. revolutions per minute. tion of the amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
“F” stands for full and “E” stands for empty.
CAUTION If the indicator gets off the graduation of
Never drive with the engine speed “E” (not character “E”), refill the tank as
indicator in the red zone or severe soon as possible.
engine damage can result.
NOTE:
The indicator moves a little depending on
road conditions (for example, slope or
curve) and driving conditions because of
fuel moving in the tank.
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,

fill the fuel tank immediately.
2-54
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE: Temperature Gauge Illumination Control

and indicator message when this light
comes on.
NOTE:
The activation point of the low fuel warning
light (1) varies depending on road condi-
tions (for example, slope or curve) and
driving conditions because of fuel moving
in the tank.
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler

door is located on the right side of the vehi-
cle. (1)
64J053 78K040
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” When the ignition switch is turned to the
position, this gauge indicates the engine “ON” position, the instrument panel lights
coolant temperature. Under normal driving come on.
conditions, the indicator should stay within
Your vehicle has a system to automatically
the normal, acceptable temperature range
between “H” and “C”. If the indicator dim the brightness of the instrument panel
lights when the parking lights or headlights
approaches “H”, overheating is indicated.
are on.
Follow the instructions for engine overheat-
ing in the “Emergency Remedies” section. You can change the brightness of the
instrument panel lights regardless of
CAUTION whether the parking lights or headlights
ore off or on.
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
engine overheating is indicated can To increase the brightness of the instru-
result in severe engine damage. ment panel lights, turn the illumination con-
trol knob (1) clockwise.
To reduce the brightness of the instrument
panel lights, turn the illumination control
knob (1) counterclockwise.
2-55
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Information Display The information display shows the follow-

EXAMPLE ing information.
(if equipped)
The information display is shown when the Display (A)
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. A/T selector position indicator (for auto-
matic transmission)
79K062 Display (B)

Warning and Indicator Messages/Fuel
NOTE: (A) (B) Consumption/Driving Range/Average
• If you do not turn the illumination control (C) (D) Speed
knob within about 5 seconds of activat-
ing the illumination control display, the Display (C)
illumination control will be canceled Trip meter/Thermometer
automatically.
• When you reconnect the battery, the Display (D)
brightness of the instrument panel lights Odometer
(1) (3) (2)
will be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-
ness according to your preference.
79K048
(1) TRIP knob

(2) MODE/ILL knob
(3) Information display
79K063
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the message shown in the
above illustration will appear on the dis-
play for several seconds.
• Some warning and indicator messages
may appear on the display when the igni-
tion switch is in the “ACC” or the “LOCK”
position.
2-56
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
A/T Selector Position To switch the display indication, push the

(for automatic transmission) EXAMPLE MODE/ILL knob (2) quickly.
EXAMPLE NOTE:
(a) The value of fuel consumption, driving
range and average speed shown in the dis-
play are affected by conditions such as the
following;
• road condition
(b) • surrounding traffic condition
78K083
• driving condition
The display (A) shows the automatic trans- • vehicle condition
mission selector position. • a malfunction which causes the malfunc-
tion indicator light to come on or blink
Fuel Consumption/Driving range/ (c)
Average Speed Instantaneous fuel consumption
When there are no warning or indicator If you selected instantaneous fuel con-
messages on the display (B), you can sumption the last time you drove the vehi-
select one of the following five indications cle, the display does not show the bar
to appear on the display, instantaneous (d) graph when the ignition switch is turned to
fuel consumption, average fuel consump- the “ON” position. The display shows the
tion, driving range, average speed, or no bar graph only when the vehicle is moving.
indication.
Average fuel consumption
(e) If you selected average fuel consumption
the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-
play shows the last value of average fuel
78K084
consumption from previous driving when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption position. Unless you reset the value of
(b) Average fuel consumption average fuel consumption, the display indi-
(c) Driving range cates the value of average fuel consump-
(d) Average speed tion which includes average fuel
(e) No indication consumption during previous driving.
2-57
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE: Driving range Average Speed

When you reconnect the negative (–) ter- If you selected driving range the last time If you selected average speed the last time
minal to the battery, the value of average you drove the vehicle, the display indicates you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
fuel consumption will be shown after driv- “---” for a few seconds and then indicates the last value of average speed from previ-
ing for a while. the current driving range when the ignition ous driving when the ignition switch is
switch is turned to the “ON” position. turned to the “ON” position. Unless you
You can select when the value of average reset the value of average speed, the dis-
The driving range shown in the display is play indicates the value of average speed
fuel consumption is reset from among the
the approximate distance you can drive which includes average speed during pre-
following three methods;
until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on vious driving.
• Reset after refuel: the value of average
current driving conditions.
fuel consumption will be reset automati-
To reset the value of average speed, push
cally by refueling. When the remaining fuel in fuel tank and hold the MODE/ILL knob (2) for about
• Reset with trip A: the value of average reaches a low level, the display “---” will 2 seconds when the display indicates an
fuel consumption will be reset automati- appear. average speed. The display shows “---”
cally by resetting trip meter A. If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill and then indicates a new average speed
• Reset manually: the value of average the fuel tank immediately regardless of the after driving for a short time.
fuel consumption will be reset by push- value of driving range shown in the display.
ing and holding the MODE/ILL knob (2)
As the driving range after refueling is cal- NOTE:
when the display indicates the average
culated based on the most recent driving When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-
fuel consumption.
condition, the value is different each time minal to the battery, the value of average
you refuel. speed will be shown after driving for a
To change when the value of average fuel
while.
consumption is reset, refer to “Setting
Mode” later in this section. NOTE:
• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
NOTE: the “ON” position, the driving range may
If you add only a small amount of fuel not indicate the correct value.
when you select “Reset after refuel”, the • When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-
average fuel consumption value may not minal to the battery, the value of driving
be reset. range will be shown after driving for a
while.
2-58
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Odometer/Trip meter/Thermometer NOTE:

When the ignition switch is turned to the CAUTION The outside temperature indication is not
“ON” position, the display (C) shows one of the actual outside temperature when driv-
the following three indications, trip meter A, Keep track of your odometer reading ing at low speed, or when stopped.
trip meter B and thermometer. Also, the and check the maintenance schedule
regularly for required services.
display (D) shows the odometer reading.
Increased wear or damage to certain
Setting mode
parts can result from failure to per-
EXAMPLE form required services at the proper EXAMPLE
(f) (i) mileage intervals.
Trip meter
(g) The trip meter can be used to measure the
distance traveled on short trips or between
79K068
fuel stops.
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
(h) position and the vehicle is stationary, you
independently.
can enter the setting mode of the informa-
To reset the trip meter to zero, push and tion display by pushing and holding the
hold the TRIP knob (1) for about 2 seconds MODE/ILL knob (2) for more than 3 sec-
when the display shows the trip meter. onds.
78K086
(f) Trip meter A Thermometer • To select the setting that you want to
(g) Trip meter B The thermometer indicates the outside change, turn the MODE/ILL knob (2) left
(h) Thermometer temperature. or right.
(i) odometer • To change the setting, push the MODE/
ILL knob (2).
To switch the display indication (C), push • To exit the setting mode, select “Back”
the TRIP knob (1) quickly. and push the MODE/ILL knob (2).
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. 79K067
If the outside temperature nears freezing,

the message shown in the above illustra-
tion will appear on the display.
2-59
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Fuel economy units Master warning indicator

EXAMPLE You can change the units that fuel con-
sumption is displayed in.
Language
You can change the language of the infor-
mation display.
79K069
Avg. fuel economy reset 78K049
NOTE: You can change when the value of average
Current settings appear with reversed text fuel consumption is reset. When the display shows warning and indi-
and background colors. cator messages, the master warning indi-
Temperature units cator may also come on or blink.
NOTE: You can change the units that temperature
• If you push and hold the MODE/ILL knob is displayed in. NOTE:
to enter the setting mode when the dis- • When the problem that causes a mes-
play (B) shows average fuel consump- NOTE: sage to appear is corrected, the mes-
tion or average speed, the value will be When you change the units that tempera- sage will disappear.
reset simultaneously. If you do not want ture is displayed in, the air conditioning • If a message is displayed, and other
to reset the value, push the MODE/ILL system temperature display units will be problems requiring a message occur, the
knob quickly to switch the indication of changed automatically. message for each of the problems will be
the display. alternately displayed about every 5 sec-
• If you turn the ignition switch or start to Default setting onds.
move the vehicle when the display If you select “YES” and push the MODE/ • When you push and hold the MODE/ILL
shows the setting mode, the setting ILL knob (2), all settings will be reinitial- knob for about 2 seconds while a mes-
mode will be canceled automatically. ized. sage is displayed, the message will dis-
appear temporarily. If the problem that
Distance units Warning and Indicator Messages caused the message is not corrected,
You can change the units odo/trip meter The display shows the warning and indica- the message will appear again after 5
distance is displayed in. tor messages to let you know about certain seconds.
vehicle problems.
NOTE: A tone may also sound to alart you.
When you change the units odo/trip meter
distance is displayed in, the trip meter will If warning and indicator messages appear
be reset automatically. on the display, follow the messages.
2-60
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and Indicator messages
Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
message Indicator
Blinks Ding Any door (including the tailgate) is open when the vehicle
is moving.
Close all doors completely.
79K070
Off Off Any door (including the tailgate) is open when the vehicle
is stopped. (#1)
Close all doors completely.
79K070
Blinks Ding There may be a problem with the ESP® system.

Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.
79K071
Blinks Ding There may be problem with the hill descent control sys-
tem and the hill hold control system.
dealer.
79K072
Blinks Continuous Front parking lights, license plate lights, instrument lights
Beep and/or head lights are left on.
Turn the lighting switch to the “OFF” position.
79K073
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
2-61
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
message Indicator
Blinks Off There may be a problem with the 4WD system.
dealer.
79K074
Off Ding Fuel is low. (#1)

Fill the fuel tank immediately.
79K075
Off Off The outside temperature is near freezing. The road may
be icy. (#1)
You should drive carefully.
79K067
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
NOTE:
• When you operate the transfer switch (if equipped), the information display may show messages other than those in the above chart.
Refer to “Using the Transfer Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details.
• When you operate the ESP OFF switch (if equipped), the information display may show messages other than those in the above chart.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details.
2-62
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Lighting Control Lever Lighting Operation

HIGH
LOW
(3)
PASS
(2)
(1)
79K101
79K100
65D611 With the headlights on, push the lever for-
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob ward to switch to the high beams (main
on the end of the lever. There are three beam) or pull the lever toward you to
WARNING positions: switch to the low beams. When the high
To avoid possible injury, do not oper- beams (main beam) are on, a light on the
ate controls by reaching through the OFF (1) instrument panel will come on. To momen-
steering wheel. All lights are off. tarily activate the high beams (main beam)
as a passing signal, pull the lever slightly
(2) toward you and release it when you have
Front parking lights, tail-lights, license plate completed the signal.
light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.
(3)
Front parking lights, tail-lights, license plate
light, instrument lights and head lights are
on.
2-63
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Lights “On” reminder (if equipped) Front Fog Light Switch Headlight Leveling Switch
A buzzer sounds to remind you to turn off
the lights if they are left on when the igni- (if equipped) (if equipped)
tion key is removed and the driver’s door is
opened.
NOTE:
The warning and indicator message and
the illumination indicator light will be shown
on the information display when this
reminder is activated.
64J058 78K042
The front fog light comes on when the fog Level the headlight beam according to the
light switch is pushed in with the headlights load condition of your vehicle by turning
are on. An indicator light above the switch this switch. The chart below shows the
will be lit when the front fog light is on. appropriate switch position for different
vehicle-load conditions.
NOTE:
In some countries the lighting operation
may be different from the above descrip-
tion according to local regulations.
2-64
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Head Light Washer Switch Turn Signal Control Lever

Switch
Vehicle Load Condition
Position (if equipped)
Driver only 0
Driver + 1 passenger
0
(in front seat)
Driver + full passengers,
1
No cargo
Driver + full passengers,
2
Cargo added
Driver + Cargo (full load) 3
65D611
64J059
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- WARNING

tion, push the head light washer switch to To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
wash the head light lenses. Washer fluid is ate controls by reaching through the
sprayed for half a second. If necessary, steering wheel.
push the switch again.
2-65
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Turn Signal Operation Hazard Warning Switch Windshield Wiper and Washer
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, move the lever up or down to activate Lever
the right or left turn signals.
64J054
Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-

vate the hazard warning lights. All four turn
signal lights and both turn signal indicators
will flash simultaneously. To turn off the
lights, push the switch again.
Use the hazard warning lights to warn
other traffic during emergency parking or
when your vehicle could otherwise become 65D611
79K102 a traffic hazard.
Normal turn signal WARNING
Move the lever all the way upward or down-
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ward to signal. When the turn is com-
ate controls by reaching through the
pleted, the signal will cancel and the lever
steering wheel.
will return to its normal position.
Lane change signal

Some times, such as when changing
lanes, the steering wheel is not turned far
enough to cancel the turn signal. For con-
venience, you can flash the turn signal by
moving the lever part way and holding it
there. The lever will return to its normal
position when you release it.
2-66
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
MIST
OFF
INT
LO
HI
63J302
63J301 63J303
If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME”
To turn the windshield wipers on, move the control, turn the control forward or rear- To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the
lever down to one of the three operating ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera- lever toward you. The windshield wipers
positions. In the “INT” position (if tion to the desired interval. will automatically turn on at low speed if
equipped), the wipers operate intermit- they are not already on and the “INT” posi-
tently. The “INT” position is very convenient tion is equipped.
for driving in mist or light rain. In the “LO”
position, the wipers operate at a steady WARNING
low speed. In the “HI” position, the wipers
operate at a steady high speed. To turn off • To prevent windshield icing in cold
the wipers, move the lever back to the weather, turn on the defroster to
“OFF” position. heat the windshield before and dur-
ing windshield washer use.
Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST” • Do not use radiator antifreeze in
position, the windshield wipers will turn on the windshield washer reservoir. It
continuously at low speed. can severely impair visibility when
sprayed on the windshield, and can
also damage your vehicle’s paint.
2-67
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch Tilt Steering Lock Lever

CAUTION (if equipped)
(if equipped)
To help prevent damage to the wind-
shield wiper and washer system EXAMPLE
Washer UNLOCK
components, you should take the fol-
lowing precautions: Wiper
• Do not continue to hold in the lever
when there is no windshield
washer fluid being sprayed or the LOCK
washer motor can be damaged.
• Do not attempt to remove dirt from
a dry windshield with the wipers or Intermittent wiper
you can damage the windshield
and the wiper blades. Always wet
the windshield with washer fluid
before operating the wipers. EXAMPLE
63J304
• Clear ice or packed snow from the 64J037
wiper blades before using the wip- To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear
ers. wiper switch on the end of the lever for- The lock lever is located under the steering
• Check the washer fluid level regu- ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle is column. To adjust the steering wheel
larly. Check it often when the equipped with the “INT” position, the rear height:
weather is bad. wiper operates intermittently when you
• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir twist the switch forward to the “INT” posi-
3/4 full during cold weather to allow tion. To turn the rear wiper off, twist the
room for expansion if the tempera- switch rearward to the “OFF” position.
ture falls low enough to freeze the To spray window washer fluid, twist the
solution. switch rearward from the “OFF” position, or
twist the switch forward from the “ON” posi-
tion. The rear wiper will turn on automati-
cally while spraying the window washer
fluid.
2-68
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
1) Pull up the lock lever to unlock the Horn Heated Rear Window and
steering column.
2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired Heated Outside Rearview
height and lock the steering column by EXAMPLE Mirrors (if equipped) Switch
pulling down the lock lever.
3) Try moving the steering wheel up and
down to make sure it is securely locked
in position.
WARNING
(1)
Never attempt to adjust the steering
wheel height while the vehicle is 78K074
moving or you could lose control of When the rear window is misted, push this
the vehicle. switch to clear the window.
78K078
Press the horn button of the steering wheel

to sound the horn. The horn will sound with
the ignition switch in any position.
(2)
64J258
If the outside rearview mirror has the mark

(2), it is also equipped with the heated out-
side rearview mirrors. When you push the
switch (1), both the heated outside rear-
view mirrors and the heated rear window
will operate simultaneously.
2-69
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
An indicator light will be lit when the

defroster is on. The defroster will only work
when the engine is running. To turn off the
defroster, push the switch (1) again.
CAUTION
The heated rear window and the
heated outside rearview mirrors (if
equipped) use a large amount of elec-
tricity. Be sure to turn off after the
window and mirrors have become
clear.
NOTE:
• The defogger will work only when the
engine is running.
• The defogger will automatically turn off
after the defogger remains on for 15 min-
utes to prevent discharging of the bat-
tery.
2-70
78KS0-37E

BEFORE DRIVING
MEMO
2-71
78KS0-37E

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-2
Engine Oil Consumption .................................................... 3-3
Ignition Switch ..................................................................... 3-3 3
Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-7
Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-9
Starting the Engine ............................................................. 3-10
Using the Transmission ..................................................... 3-12
Using the Transfer Switch (if equipped) ........................... 3-18
Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-29
Braking ................................................................................. 3-30
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) (if equipped) .......... 3-33
60G408
78KS0-37E

Exhaust Gas Warning: NO
Exhaust Gas Warning

WARNING WARNING
(Continued) (Continued)
• Do not park with the engine run- • Have the exhaust system inspected
ning for a long period of time, even periodically for damage and leaks.
in an open area. If it is necessary to Any damage or leaks should be
sit for a short time in a parked vehi- repaired immediately.
cle with the engine running, make
sure the air intake selector is set to
“FRESH AIR” and the fan is at high
speed.
• Avoid operating the vehicle with
the rear door, tailgate or rear win-
dow open. If it is necessary to oper-
ate the vehicle with the rear door,
52D334 tailgate or rear window open, make
sure the folding sunroof (if
WARNING equipped) and all the windows are
closed, and the fan is at high speed
Avoid breathing exhaust gases. with the air intake selector set to
Exhaust gases contain carbon mon- “FRESH AIR”.
oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is • To allow proper operation of your
colorless and odorless. Since carbon vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
monoxide is difficult to detect by the air inlet grille in front of the
itself, be sure to take the following windshield clear of snow, leaves, or
precautions to help prevent carbon other obstructions at all times.
monoxide from entering your vehicle. • Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear
• Do not leave the engine running in of snow and other material to help
garages or other confined areas. reduce the buildup of exhaust
(Continued) gases under the vehicle. This is
particularly important when parked
in blizzard conditions.
(Continued)
3-1
78KS0-37E

Daily Inspection Checklist: NO
Daily Inspection Checklist 4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and ing for proper latch operation. See the
latched. item “All Latches, Hinges & Locks” of
Before Driving 5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights, “CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Periodic
brake lights and horn for proper opera- Maintenance Schedule” in the
tion. “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
6) Adjust the seat and adjustable head section for lubrication schedule.
restraint (if equipped).
7) Check the brake pedal and the parking WARNING
brake lever.
8) Adjust the mirrors. Make sure the hood is fully closed
9) Make sure that you and all passengers and latched before driving. If it is not,
have properly fastened your seat belts. it can fly up unexpectedly during
10)Make sure that all warning lights come driving, obstructing your view and
on as the key is turned to the “ON” or resulting in an accident.
“START” position.
11)Check all gauges. Once a month, or each time you fill your
12)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a
60A187S WARNING light turns off when the tire pressure gauge. Also check the tire
parking brake is released. pressure of the spare tire.
1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights,
and reflectors are clean and unob-
structed. Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel
2) Visually check the tires for the following tank, perform the following under-hood
points: checks:
– the depth of the tread groove 1) Engine oil level
– abnormal wear, cracks and damage 2) Coolant level
– loose wheel nuts 3) Brake fluid level
– existence of foreign material such as 4) Power steering (if equipped) fluid level
nails, stones, etc. 5) Windshield washer fluid level
Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND 6) Battery solution level
MAINTENANCE” section for details. 7) Hood latch operation
3) Look for fluid and oil leaks. Pull the hood release handle inside the
vehicle. Make sure that you cannot
NOTE: open the hood all the way without
It is normal for water to drip from the air releasing the secondary latch. Be sure
conditioning system after use. to close the hood securely after check-
3-2
78KS0-37E

Engine Oil Consumption:
Starting the Engine: 1
Engine Oil Consumption making it appear that the oil level has not Ignition Switch
changed.
It is normal for the engine to consume
You should also be aware that the diluting
some engine oil during normal vehicle
ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle
operation.
is subsequently driven at high speeds,
The amount of engine oil consumed such as on an expressway, making it
depends on the viscosity of the oil, the appear that oil is excessively consumed
quality of the oil and the conditions the after high-speed driving.
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed during high-speed
driving and when there is frequent acceler-
ation and deceleration. Under high loads,
your engine also will consume more oil.
A new engine also consumes more oil,
since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder
walls have not yet become conditioned. 65D611
New engines reach the normal level of oil
consumption only after approximately 5000
km (3000 miles) driving. WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
Oil consumption: ate controls by reaching through the
Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km steering wheel.
(1 Qt. per 600 miles)
When judging the amount of oil consump-

tion, note that the oil may become diluted
and make it difficult to accurately judge the
true oil level.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more of driv-
ing. This is because the oil is gradually
becoming diluted with fuel or moisture,
3-3
78KS0-37E

Vehicle Without Keyless Start Sys- Manual transmission ACC

tem Accessories such as the radio can oper-
ate, but the engine is off.
EXAMPLE
ON
This is the normal operating position. All
electrical systems are on.
Push
START
This is the position for starting the engine
using the starter motor. The key should be
released from this position as soon as the
engine starts.
Turn to “LOCK”
60A055
Ignition key reminder (if equipped)
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
60B041 • Manual transmission vehicles you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
You must push in the key to turn it to the ignition switch when the driver’s door is
The ignition switch has the following four “LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and
positions: opened.
prevents normal use of the steering
wheel after the key is removed.
LOCK
This is the normal parking position. It is the • Automatic transmission vehicles
only position in which the key can be The gearshift lever must be in the “P”
removed. (Park) position to turn the key to the
It locks the ignition, and prevents normal “LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and
use of the steering wheel after the key is prevents normal use of the steering
removed. wheel and gearshift lever.
To release the steering lock, insert the key
and turn it clockwise to one of the other
positions. If you have trouble turning the
key to unlock the steering, try turning the
steering wheel slightly to the right or left
while turning the key.
3-4
78KS0-37E

Vehicle With Keyless Start System of the remote controller may be unreli-
able.
NOTE:
(3)
• If the battery of the remote controller
(2) (4) runs down or there are strong radio
waves or noise, the operating range may
be narrower or the remote controller may
be inoperative.
(1) • If the remote controller is too close to the
door, it may not operate.
• The ignition switch may not turn when
the remote controller is on the instru-
EXAMPLE ment panel, in the glove box, in a stor-
78K027 age compartment, in the sun visor or on
63J270
If the keyless start system blue indicator the floor.
The ignition switch can be operated with- light illuminates on the instrument cluster,
out using an ignition key when the remote you can turn the ignition switch. If the red CAUTION
controller is in an area of the vehicle other indicator light illuminates, you can not turn The remote controller is a sensitive
than the rear luggage area. To turn the the ignition switch. electronic instrument. To avoid dam-
ignition switch, first push in the switch. aging the remote controller:
NOTE: • Do not expose it to impacts, mois-
NOTE: • The ignition switch can be turned to the ture or high temperature such as by
You must push in the ignition switch to turn “ACC” position when the keyless start leaving it on the dashboard under
it from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC” system blue indicator light illuminates. direct sunlight.
position. To return to the “LOCK” position The blue indicator light will illuminate for • Keep the remote controller away
from the “ACC” position, turn the ignition several seconds when you push in the from magnetic objects such as a
switch counterclockwise while pushing in ignition switch and then will turn off to television.
the switch. protect the system. In this case, you
must release the ignition switch and You can also turn the ignition switch by
push it in again to illuminate the blue inserting the ignition key into the slot.
indicator light.
• If the keyless start system red indicator If you leave any of the doors open with the
light illuminates, the remote controller ignition switch in the “ACC” position for a
may not be in the vehicle or the battery while (and no key inserted), the engine
may not start when you turn the ignition
3-5
78KS0-37E

Using the Transmission: 10
switch to “START”. If the engine does not ACC (2)

start, close all doors completely or turn the Accessories such as the radio can oper-
ignition switch back to the “LOCK” position, ate, but the engine is off.
then start the engine.
ON (3)
The ignition switch has the following four This is the normal operating position. All
positions: electrical systems are on.
LOCK (1) START (4)

This is the normal parking position. It is the This is the position for starting the engine
only position in which the key can be using the starter motor. The switch should
removed. It locks the ignition, and prevents be released from this position as soon as
normal use of the steering wheel. the engine starts.
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto- Ignition switch reminder 81A297S
matic transmission key inter lock system, (When using the keyless start system)
the ignition switch can be turned to the A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
“LOCK” position only when the gearshift WARNING
you to return the ignition switch to the
lever is in the “P” (Park) position. “LOCK” position if it is in the “ACC” position • Never return the ignition switch to
To release the steering lock, turn the igni- when the driver’s door is opened. the “LOCK” position and remove
tion switch clockwise to one of the other the ignition key while the vehicle is
positions. If you have trouble turning the Ignition key reminder moving. The steering wheel will
ignition switch to unlock the steering, try (When using the ignition key) lock and you will not be able to
turning the steering wheel slightly to the A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind steer the vehicle.
right or left while turning the switch. you to remove the ignition key if it is in the (Continued)
ignition switch when the driver’s door is
NOTE: opened.
You must push the ignition switch in to turn
it to the “ACC” position. Also you must
push the ignition switch in to return it to the
“LOCK” position.
3-6
78KS0-37E

Parking Brake Lever

WARNING CAUTION
(Continued) • Do not use the starter motor for EXAMPLE
• Always return the ignition switch to more than 15 seconds at a time.
the “LOCK” position and remove For diesel engine model, do not (1)
the ignition key and the remote use the starter motor for more than
controller (if equipped) when leav- 30 seconds at a time. If the engine
ing the vehicle even if a short time. does not start, wait 15 seconds
Also do not leave children or pets before trying again. If the engine (2)
alone in a parked vehicle. Unat- does not start after several
tended children or pets could attempts, check the fuel and igni-
cause accidental movement of the tion systems or consult your (3)
vehicle or could tamper with power SUZUKI dealer.
windows or power sunroof. They • Do not leave the ignition switch in
also could suffer from heat stroke the “ON” position if the engine is
in warm or hot weather. These not running as the battery will dis- 64J081
could result in severe injury or charge. (1) To set
even death. (2) To release
(3) To release
The parking brake lever is located between

the seats. To set the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal down and pull the parking
brake lever all the way up. To release the
parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,
push the button on the end of the lever with
your thumb, and lower the lever to its origi-
nal position.
3-7
78KS0-37E

For automatic transmission vehicles,

always set the parking brake before mov- WARNING WARNING
ing the gearshift lever to the “P” (PARK)
position. If you park on an incline and shift Always set the parking brake fully When parking the vehicle in
into “P” before setting the parking brake, before leaving your vehicle or it may extremely cold weather, the following
the weight of the vehicle may make it diffi- move, causing injury or damage. procedure should be used:
cult to shift out of “P” when you are ready When parking, make sure the gear- 1) Set the parking brake.
to drive the vehicle. shift lever for manual transmission 2) Shift the manual transmission into
vehicles is in 1st gear or “R” reverse or first gear, or the auto-
When preparing to drive the vehicle, move (Reverse) and the gearshift lever for matic transmission into “P”
the gearshift lever out of the “P” position automatic transmission vehicles is in (Park).
before releasing the parking brake. “P” (Park). Never leave the transfer 3) With the engine off, get out of the
lever (if equipped) in “N” (Neutral) vehicle and put chocks under the
WARNING when you are parked. Remember, wheels.
even though the transmission is in 4) Release the parking brake.
• Never drive your vehicle with the gear or in Park, you must set the When you return to your vehicle,
parking brake on: rear brake effec- parking brake fully. you must remember to first set the
tiveness can be reduced from over- parking brake, then remove the
heating, brake life may be wheel chocks.
shortened, or permanent brake
damage may result.
• If the parking brake does not hold
the vehicle securely or does not
fully release, have your vehicle
inspected immediately by an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer.
3-8
78KS0-37E

Using the Transfer Switch: 10
Pedal Clutch Pedal (1)

(For manual transmission) WARNING
Manual transmission The clutch pedal is used to disengage the
drive to the wheels when starting the Do not “ride” the brakes by applying
engine, stopping, or shifting the gearshift them continuously or resting your
lever or transfer lever (if equipped). foot on the pedal. This will result in
Depressing the pedal disengages the overheating of the brakes which
clutch. could cause unpredictable braking
action, longer stopping distances, or
permanent brake damage.
CAUTION
Do not drive with your foot resting on Accelerator Pedal (3)
the clutch pedal. It could result in This pedal controls the speed of the
(3) excessive clutch wear, clutch dam- engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal
(2) age, or unexpected loss of engine increases power output and speed.
(1) braking.
64J082
Brake Pedal (2)
Automatic transmission Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with
either front and rear disc brakes or front
disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Depressing the brake pedal applies both
sets of brakes.
You may hear occasional brake squeal
when you apply the brakes. This is a nor-
mal condition caused by environmental
factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.
WARNING
(3)
(2) If brake squeal is excessive and
occurs each time the brakes are
64J083 applied, you should have the brakes
checked by your SUZUKI dealer.
3-9
78KS0-37E

Starting the Engine Starting a Cold and Warm Engine

WARNING (For Gasoline Engine Model)
Before Starting the Engine Make sure that the parking brake is With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
set fully and the transmission is in crank the engine by turning the ignition key
Neutral (or Park for vehicles with an to “START”. Release the key when the
automatic transmission) before engine starts.
attempting to start the engine.
CAUTION
• Stop turning the starter immedi-
ately after the engine has started or
the starter system can be dam-
aged.
• Do not crank the engine for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the
engine doesn’t start on the first try,
wait about 15 seconds before try-
64J140
ing again.
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully. If the engine does not start after 15 sec-
2) Manual transmission – Shift into “N” onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,
(Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal then press down the accelerator pedal to
all the way to the floor. Hold the clutch 1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engine
pedal while starting the engine. again. Release the key and accelerator
Automatic transmission – If the gear- pedal when the engine starts.
shift lever is not in “P” (Park) position,
shift into “P” (Park). (If you need to re- If the engine still does not start, try holding
start the engine while the vehicle is the accelerator pedal all the way to the
moving, shift into “N”.) floor while cranking. This should clear the
engine if it is flooded.
NOTE:
Automatic transmission vehicles have a
starter interlock device which is designed
to keep the starter from operating if the
transmission is in any of the drive posi-
tions.
3-10
78KS0-37E

(For Diesel Engine Model) Caution when stopping the engine with Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®)
turbocharger (if equipped)
Cold engine
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position
When stopping the engine after climbing or The DPF® filters off the soot particles in
and wait until the glow plug indicator goes
high speed driving, let the engine idle for the exhaust gas, so the DPF® could get
about one minute or more (if it is not pro- clogged depending on the driving condi-
out if it comes on. Crank the engine by
turning the ignition key to “START”.
hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and tion. The DPF® is cleaned by the regener-
engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil ating function that combusts the soot
Release the key when the engine starts. from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated particles in the DPF® by raising the
engine oil will damage the bearings of the exhaust gas temperature during driving.
CAUTION turbocharger.
• The starter is allowed to crank the WARNING
engine up to 30 seconds. If the Restarting F9Q diesel engine after fuel-
engine failed to start, wait 15 sec- empty stop Keep away from the exhaust pipe
onds, then restart cranking. Even if when the engine is running. If the
the third trial failed, consult autho- DPF® is regenerating, the exhaust
rized SUZUKI dealer. gas temperature could be higher.
• If the engine is started after long
time parking at extremely cold NOTE:
atmosphere such as the ambient When you drive your vehicle, white smoke
temperature is below –20°C, may be emitted depending on the grade of
release ignition key from start posi- fuel used. This is due to the particle filter
tion and stop cranking after con- regenerating automatically, and does not
firming the engine speed increase (1) affect the way the vehicle runs.
around 800 to 1000 rpm.
Warm engine
Crank the engine by turning the ignition
78K076
key to “START”. Release the key when the
engine starts. The engine stops if the engine feels fuel
emptiness. To restart the engine, stop the
vehicle, fill the tank (minimum 5 liters) and
operate the manual priming pump (1)
attached to the fuel filter until resistance is
felt. Then perform the engine starting pro-
cedure.
3-11
78KS0-37E

DPF® warning light Using the Transmission

EXAMPLE
Manual Transmission
64J244
If the DPF® warning light comes on when

driving, the DPF® is nearly clogged. You
should regenerate the DPF® when the
DPF® warning light comes on. To regener-
ate the DPF®, you must drive the vehicle
until the light goes out, at a speed of 75 54G583
km/h (47 mph) or higher for a while (max. Keep the engine speed so it does not get
30 minutes). into the red zone of tachometer.
However, you should drive carefully and 65D449
within the legal speed limit, and should Starting off WARNING
take in to consideration the surrounding To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the
traffic condition. If you drive your vehicle way to the floor and shift into 1st gear. • Reduce your speed and downshift
until the light goes out, the regeneration of After releasing the parking brake, gradually to a lower gear before going down
the DPF® will be completed. release the clutch. When you hear a a long or steep hill. A lower gear
change in the engine’s sound, slowly press will allow the engine to provide
CAUTION the accelerator while continuing to gradu- braking. Avoid riding the brakes or
ally release the clutch. they may overheat, resulting in
Be sure to regenerate the DPF® when brake failure.
the DPF® warning light comes on. • When driving on slippery roads, be
Failure to regenerate the DPF® will Shifting
All forward gears are synchronized, which sure to slow down before down-
cause a vehicle malfunction due to shifting. Excessive and or sudden
the clogged filter. provides for quiet, and easy shifting.
Always push in the clutch pedal fully before changes in engine speed may
shifting gears. cause loss of traction, which could
cause you to lose control.
• Make sure that the vehicle is com-
pletely stationary before you shift
into reverse.
3-12
78KS0-37E

5-Speed Automatic Transmission Power mode selector switch

CAUTION
• To help avoid clutch damage, do EXAMPLE
not use the clutch pedal as a foot-
rest while driving or use the clutch
to keep the vehicle stationary on a
hill. Depress the clutch fully when
shifting.
• When shifting or starting off, do not
race the engine. Racing the engine
can shorten engine life and affect
smooth shifting.
(1)
66J055 65D448
(1) Power mode selector switch When you need more power for climbing
hills or smooth starting on slippery road,
D: push the “A/T POWER” switch. To activate
5-speed automatic transmission mode the power mode selector, push the “A/T
4: POWER” switch, and the “POWER” indica-
4-speed automatic transmission mode tor light in the instrument cluster comes on.
To deactivate, push the switch again, and
The 4-speed mode is suitable for the fol- the “POWER” indicator light goes off.
lowing driving conditions:
• Driving on hilly, winding roads Power driving mode
– You can drive more smoothly with less When the “A/T POWER” switch is on with
frequent gearshifting shift in “D” (Drive) or “4” (Low 3) position, if
• Going down a steep hill you depress the accelerator pedal, the
– Some engine braking is provided shifting points are delayed so the engine
can rev higher in each gear. Therefore, you
NOTE: can drive more powerfully than normal
With the transfer switch in the “4L LOCK” driving.
position, the 5-speed automatic transmis-
sion will remain in the 4-speed mode.
3-13
78KS0-37E

Slippery road mode Gearshift lever For all normal driving, make sure that the
When the “A/T POWER” switch is on with “POWER” indicator light is off, then put the
shift in “3” (Low 2) position, the gear will be EXAMPLE gearshift lever into “D” (Drive). Use the
fixed in second. Therefore, you can drive other gearshift lever positions as described
smoothly on slippery road. If you keep below:
accelerating, the gear will be changed into
third. P (Park)
Use this position to lock the transmission
NOTE: when the vehicle is parked or when start-
• When you start driving with the gearshift ing the engine. Shift into Park only when
lever in “3” (Low 2) position while the “A/ the vehicle is completely stationary.
T POWER” switch is on, the gear will be
automatically changed between second WARNING
and third. If you need to shift up, shift the
lever into “4” (Low 3) or “D” (Drive) posi- If you have a 4-wheel drive vehicle,
tion. 66J056
never leave the transfer switch in “N”
• When the “A/T POWER” is on, if you (Neutral) when parked.
The gearshift lever is designed that it can Otherwise the vehicle may roll even if
shift the gearshift lever into “3” (Low 2) not be shifted out of the “P” position unless
position, the gear will not downshift into the transmission is in Park.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position
first when start driving. and the brake pedal is depressed. R (Reverse)
Use this position to reverse the vehicle
WARNING from stop. Make sure that vehicle is com-
Always depress the brake pedal pletely stationary before shifting into
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or Reverse.
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station-
ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to N (Neutral)
help prevent the vehicle from moving Use this position for starting the engine if
unexpectedly when you shift. the engine stalls and you need to restart it
while the vehicle is moving. You may also
shift into Neutral and depress the brake
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during
idling.
3-14
78KS0-37E

D (Drive) NOTE: 4-Speed Automatic Transmission

Use this position for all normal driving. If you move the gearshift lever to a lower
gear while driving faster than the maximum EXAMPLE
With the gearshift lever in “D” range you allowable speed for the lower gear, the
can get an automatic downshift by press- transmission will not actually downshift
ing the accelerator pedal. The higher the until your speed drops below the maximum
vehicle speed is, the more you need to speed for the lower gear.
press the accelerator pedal to get a down-
shift.
CAUTION
4 (Low 3) Be sure to take the following precau-
Use this position for driving on moderate tions to help avoid damage to the
uphill and downhill gradients. The engine automatic transmission:
braking effect on moderate downhills can • Make sure that the vehicle is com-
be used in this position. The transmission pletely stationary before shifting (1)
shifts up only to 4th gear. into “P” or “R”. 64J141
• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,
3 (Low 2) “D”, “4”, “3”, or “L” when the (1) Power mode selector switch
Use this position to provide extra power engine is running above idle speed. D:
when climbing hills, or to provide engine • Do not rev the engine with the 4-speed automatic transmission mode
braking when going down hills. transmission in a drive position 3:
(“R”, “D”, “4”, “3”, or “L”) and the 3-speed automatic transmission mode
NOTE: rear wheels not moving.
In these 4 or 3 positions, if the power mode • Do not use the accelerator to hold The 3-speed mode is suitable for the fol-
selector switch is turned to the “ON” posi- the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi- lowing driving conditions:
tion, the transmission will not downshift cle’s brakes. • Driving on hilly, winding roads
into “L” (Low 1). – You can drive more smoothly with less
frequent gearshifting
L (Low 1) • Going down a steep hill
Use this position to provide maximum – Some engine braking is provided
power when climbing steep hills or driving
through deep snow or mud, or to provide NOTE:
maximum engine braking when going With the transfer switch in the “4L LOCK”
down steep hills. position, the 4-speed automatic transmis-
sion will remain in the 3-speed mode.
3-15
78KS0-37E

Power mode selector switch Slippery road mode Gearshift lever

When the “A/T POWER” switch is on with
shift in “2” (Low 2) position, the gear will be
fixed in second while driving or when start
driving. Therefore, you can drive smoothly
on slippery road.
NOTE:
• When you start driving with the gearshift
lever in “2” (Low 2) position while the “A/
T POWER” switch is on, the gear will be
fixed in second. If you need to shift up,
shift the lever into “3” (Low 3) or “D”
(Drive) position.
• When the “A/T POWER” is on, if you
65D448 shift the gearshift lever from “3” (Low 3) 64J142
When you need more power for climbing or “D” (Drive) position to “2” (Low 2) posi- The gearshift lever is designed that it can
hills or smooth starting on slippery road, tion, the gear will be fixed in second. not be shifted out of the “P” position unless
push the “A/T POWER” switch. To activate the ignition switch is in the “ON” position
the power mode selector, push the “A/T and the brake pedal is depressed.
POWER” switch, and the “POWER” indica-
tor light in the instrument cluster comes on. WARNING
To deactivate, push the switch again, and
the “POWER” indicator light goes off. Always depress the brake pedal
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or
Power driving mode “N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station-
When the “A/T POWER” switch is on with ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to
shift in “D” (Drive) or “3” (Low 3), if you help prevent the vehicle from moving
depress the accelerator pedal, the shifting unexpectedly when you shift.
points are delayed so the engine can rev
higher in each gear. Therefore, you can
drive more powerfully than normal driving.
3-16
78KS0-37E

Braking: 6
For all normal driving, make sure that the D (Drive) NOTE:
“POWER” indicator light is off, then put the Use this position for all normal driving. If you move the gearshift lever to a lower
gearshift lever into “D” (Drive). Use the gear while driving faster than the maximum
With the gearshift lever in “D” range you allowable speed for the lower gear, the
other gearshift lever positions as described
can get an automatic downshift by press- transmission will not actually downshift
below:
ing the accelerator pedal. The higher the until your speed drops below the maximum
vehicle speed is, the more you need to speed for the lower gear.
P (Park)
press the accelerator pedal to get a down-
Use this position to lock the transmission
shift.
when the vehicle is parked or when start- CAUTION
ing the engine. Shift into Park only when
3 (Low 3) Be sure to take the following precau-
the vehicle is completely stationary.
Use this position for driving on moderate tions to help avoid damage to the
uphill and downhill gradients. The engine automatic transmission:
WARNING braking effect on moderate downhills can • Make sure that the vehicle is com-
If you have a 4-wheel drive vehicle, be used in this position. The transmission pletely stationary before shifting
never leave the transfer switch in “N” shifts up only to 3rd gear. into “P” or “R”.
(Neutral) when parked. 2 (Low 2) • Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,
Otherwise the vehicle may roll even if Use this position to provide extra power “D”, “3”, “2”, or “L” when the
the transmission is in Park. when climbing hills, or to provide engine engine is running above idle speed.
braking when going down hills. • Do not rev the engine with the
R (Reverse) transmission in a drive position
Use this position to reverse the vehicle NOTE: (“R”, “D”, “3”, “2”, or “L”) and the
from stop. Make sure that vehicle is com- In these 3 or 2 positions, if the power mode rear wheels not moving.
pletely stationary before shifting into selector switch is turned to the “ON” posi- • Do not use the accelerator to hold
Reverse. tion, the transmission will not downshift the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-
into “L” (Low 1). cle’s brakes.
N (Neutral)
Use this position for starting the engine if L (Low 1)
the engine stalls and you need to restart it Use this position to provide maximum
while the vehicle is moving. You may also power when climbing steep hills or driving
shift into Neutral and depress the brake through deep snow or mud, or to provide
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during maximum engine braking when going
idling. down steep hills.
3-17
78KS0-37E

Braking: 6
If You Can Not Shift Automatic 4) Remove the cover (1) on the hole. Using the Transfer Switch
Transmission Gearshift Lever Out 5) With inserting the key or the flat end rod
of “P” (PARK) into the slot in the hole, shift the gear- (if equipped)
shift lever to the desired position.
Left hand drive vehicle
This procedure is for emergency use only.
(1) If repeated use of this procedure is neces-
sary, or the procedure does not work as
described, take the vehicle to your dealer
for repair.
66J168
78K043 Your vehicle is equipped with a four-mode
Vehicles with an automatic transmission full-time 4x4 system. You can use the
have an electrically operated park-lock fea- transfer switch to select any of the four
ture. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, modes: N, 4H, 4H LOCK, 4L LOCK.
or there is some other electrical failure, the
automatic transmission cannot be shifted
out of Park in the normal way. Jump start-
ing may correct the condition. If not, follow
the procedure described below. This pro-
cedure will permit shifting the transmission
out of Park.
1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
2) If the engine is running, stop the
engine.
3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
3-18
78KS0-37E

Break-In: 6
Catalytic Converter: NO
(1) Front differential

(2) Engine
(3) Transmission
(4) High/Low clutch
(5) Transfer case
(6) Center differential
(7) Differential lock clutch
(4) (6) (7) (9) (8) Chain
(2) (3) (5) (9) Rear propeller shaft
(10) Rear differential
(11) Front propeller shaft
(8)
(10)
(1)
(11)
64J143
3-19
78KS0-37E

Catalytic Converter: NO
Improving Fuel Economy: NO
Description of Transfer Switch Positions In this position, engine power is not sup-
plied to the front or rear axles. Only use
N (Neutral) this position for towing your vehicle.
When you turn the transfer switch to the
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with
the buzzer sound.
WARNING
Never leave the transfer switch in “N”
(Neutral) when parked.
When the transfer switch is in “N”
(Neutral), the vehicle may roll even if
the transmission is in gear or in Park.
64J223
3-20
78KS0-37E

Improving Fuel Economy: NO
4H (4-wheel drive high range) In this position, engine power is supplied to

the front and rear axles. Use this position
for normal driving.
64J220
3-21
78KS0-37E

4H LOCK (4-wheel drive high range center differential lock) In this position, engine power is supplied to
the front and rear axles and you get better
traction than when driving in “4H”. Use this
position when you need better traction
than “4H” provides, such as when driving
on slippery roads etc.
64J221
3-22
78KS0-37E

4L LOCK (4-wheel drive low range center differential lock) In this position, engine power is supplied to
the front and rear axles and you get better
traction and more low-speed torque than
when driving in “4H”. Use this position
when you need better traction than “4H”
provides and more low-speed torque than
“4H LOCK” provides, such as when climb-
ing or descending steep, slippery hills etc.
NOTE:
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the
ESP® systems (other than ABS) (if
equipped) will be canceled to provide
improved vehicle traction, and the “ESP
OFF” indicator light will come on.
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, brake-
traction control can be activated. Brake-
traction control brakes the spinning wheel
to distribute drive power to the other
wheels for increased climbing ability or for
better performance on a rolling hill or a
slippery surface.
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler

AG.
64J222
3-23
78KS0-37E

Transfer Switch Operation transfer switch. Be sure to wait until traf- NOTE:
Operate the transfer switch according to fic conditions allow you to accelerate and • When shifting between the transfer
the appropriate procedure described decelerate safety before using this pro- switch position and the transfer gear
below: cedure. position is unmatched, all 4WD indica-
tors will blink.
From N to 4H From 4H LOCK to 4L LOCK • If it is difficult to shift between “4H” and
Stop the vehicle completely, place the Stop the vehicle completely, place the “4H LOCK” while the vehicle is moving,
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress try accelerating and decelerating your
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully vehicle several times after turning the
(if equipped), then push in and turn the (if equipped), then push in and turn the transfer switch. Be sure to wait until traf-
switch to shift into “4H”. switch to shift into “4L LOCK”. fic conditions allow you to accelerate and
decelerate safety before using this pro-
From 4H to 4H LOCK From 4L LOCK to 4H LOCK cedure.
You can operate the transfer switch either Stop the vehicle completely, place the
when the vehicle is stopped or while the transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress From 4H to N
vehicle is moving. the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully
(if equipped), then push in and turn the
Position the front wheels straight ahead switch to shift into “4H LOCK”. (1)
and turn the switch to shift into “4H LOCK”.
If the vehicle is moving, we recommend From 4H LOCK to 4H
that the speed be less than 100 km/h (60 You can operate the transfer switch either
mph) during this operation. when the vehicle is stopped or while the
vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
Position the front wheels straight ahead
Do not operate the transfer switch and turn the switch to shift into “4H”. If the
while tires are racing. vehicle is moving, we recommend that the
speed be less than 100 km/h (60 mph) dur-
NOTE: ing this operation.
• When shifting between the transfer 64J209
switch position and the transfer gear CAUTION Stop the vehicle completely, place the
position is unmatched, all 4WD indica-
Do not operate the transfer switch transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress
tors will blink.
while tires are racing. the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully
• If it is difficult to shift between “4H” and
(if equipped), then push in and turn the
“4H LOCK” while the vehicle is moving,
switch to the mark (1) at the left of the “N”
try accelerating and decelerating your
position, and hold the switch in this posi-
vehicle several times after turning the
3-24
78KS0-37E

tion for 5 seconds until the “N” indicator

blinks, then turn the switch to the “N” posi- CAUTION CAUTION
tion.
When you turn the transfer switch to the • Be sure to stop the vehicle com- (Continued)
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with pletely before operating the trans- • Do not operate the vehicle while a
the buzzer sound. fer switch to shift between “N” and 4WD mode indicator is blinking
“4H”, or between “4H LOCK” and except when shifting between “4H”
“4L LOCK”. and “4L LOCK”.
• Do not shift between “4H” and “4H If you operate the vehicle while a
LOCK” unless the front wheels are 4WD mode indicator is blinking, a
in the straight-ahead position and buzzer will sound and the transfer
we recommend that the vehicle will shift to “N” (Neutral) to prevent
speed be less than 100 km/h (60 transfer case damage.
mph). In this case, use the following pro-
Do not operate the transfer switch cedure.
while tires are racing. 1) Release your foot from the accel-
• Do not operate your vehicle in “4H erator pedal and depress the
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry, hard brake pedal to stop the vehicle
surfaces. completely.
(Continued) 2) Depress the clutch pedal fully (if
equipped) or shift the automatic
transmission gearshift lever to the
“N” position.
3) If the transfer does not shift from
“N” although you perform 1) and
2), turn the transfer switch to the
position previously selected and
operate the switch again.
NOTE:
and indicator message when the transfer
system is operated, or has a problem.
3-25
78KS0-37E

The basic operation for transfer switch

Current Position Current Indicator Target Position Target Indicator
N 4H –
4H –
4H LOCK
4H –
4H LOCK
4L LOCK
4L LOCK 4H LOCK
N: Neutral
4H: 4-wheel drive high range mode
4H LOCK: 4-wheel drive high range center differential lock mode
4L LOCK: 4-wheel drive low range center differential lock mode
3-26
78KS0-37E

Warning and Indicator messages

Transfer Switch Master Warn-
Warning and Indicator messages Sound Cause and Remedy
Operation ing Indicator
In any position Blinks Off There may be a problem with the 4WD
system.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized SUZUKI dealer.
79K074
In “N” position Blinks Series of This message informs you that the
Beeps transfer switch is in “N”, which is used
only for towing your vehicle.
Move the transfer switch to a different
position unless you are planning to tow
79K077
your vehicle.
Switching between Off Off This message informs you the 4WD
“4H” and mode is switching.
“4H LOCK”
79K078
In “4H” position Blinks Off Tires are slipping.

Turn the transfer switch to “4H LOCK” or
“4L LOCK” position.
79K079
3-27
78KS0-37E

Transfer Switch Master Warn-

Warning and Indicator messages Sound Cause and Remedy
Operation ing Indicator
Switching between Off Beep (For automatic transmission)
“4H LOCK” and The desired transfer gear has not been
“4L LOCK” engaged.
Switching between Release your foot from the accelerator
“4H” and “N” pedal.
Depress the brake pedal.
79K080
Shift the automatic transmission gear-
shift lever to the “N” position.
Off Beep (For manual transmission)
The desired transfer gear has not been
engaged.
Release your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
79K081 Depress the brake pedal and clutch
pedal.
Off Beep or The desired transfer gear has not been
Off engaged.
Turn the transfer switch back to the pre-
viously selected position, and operate
79K082 the transfer switch again.
Off Off This message informs you the 4WD
mode is switching.
Do not move your vehicle.
79K083
3-28
78KS0-37E

Cruise Control (if equipped)
(2)
52D113 (4)
When you push the “ON/OFF” switch, the (1)
(3)
system is on and a “CRUISE” indicator
light on the instrument cluster will be on.
79K049
79K032 To Set Cruising Speed

The cruise control system allows you to Turn on the cruise control system by push-
maintain a steady speed without keeping ing the “ON/OFF” switch (1). Accelerate to
your foot on the accelerator pedal. The the desired speed and push the “SET/
65D474
controls for operating the cruise control COAST” switch (3). Take your foot off the
When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by accelerator pedal and the set speed will be
system are on the steering wheel. You can the cruise control system, a “SET” indica-
use the cruise control system at speeds of maintained.
tor light on the instrument cluster will be
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher. on. With the cruise control on, you can
increase speed for passing by using the
WARNING accelerator pedal. When you take your foot
off the pedal, your vehicle will return to the
To help avoid loss of vehicle control,
set speed.
do not use the cruise control system
when driving in heavy traffic, on slip-
pery or winding roads, or on steep To Change Cruising Speed
downgrades. To reset the cruise control to a slower
speed, hold in the “SET/COAST” switch (3)
until the vehicle has slowed to the desired
speed, then release the switch. The new
speed will be maintained.
3-29
78KS0-37E

To reset the cruise control to a faster To “Resume” a Previously Set Braking

speed, use either of the following proce- Speed
dures: After canceling cruise control operation
• Hold in the “RES/ACC” switch (4). Vehi- without turning off the “ON/OFF” switch
cle speed will steadily increase. When (1), you can “resume” a previously set
you release the switch, the new speed speed, by holding the “RES/ACC” switch
will be maintained. (4) for about one second. When you
• Accelerate to the desired speed using release the switch, the vehicle will acceler-
the accelerator pedal and push the ate to and maintain the previously set
“SET/COAST” switch (3). The new speed.
speed will be maintained.
NOTE:
If the “ON/OFF” switch (1) is turned off, the
To Cancel set speed in the memory is cleared and
To cancel cruise control operation, use one
you can not use the Resume feature. In
of the following procedures:
this case, reset your CRUISE speed. 60G165S
• Slightly depress the brake pedal or
clutch pedal, or push the “CANCEL” The distance needed to bring any vehicle
switch (2). Cruise control operation will to a halt increases with the speed of the
be canceled until you reset a cruising vehicle. The braking distance needed, for
speed by pushing the “SET/COAST” example, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be
switch (3) or “RES/ACC” switch (4). approximately 4 times greater than the
• Push the “ON/OFF” switch (1). Cruise braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19
control operation will be canceled until mph). Start to brake the vehicle when there
you turn on the system by pushing the is plenty of distance between your vehicle
“ON/OFF” switch (1) again and reset a and the stopping point, and slow down
cruising speed by pushing the “SET/ gradually.
COAST” switch (3).
Cruise control operation will also be can-
celed any time the vehicle speed falls
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
3-30
78KS0-37E

NOTE:
WARNING WARNING The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is
under about 5 – 6 km/h (3 – 4 mph).
If water gets into the brake drums, Even without reserve power in the
brake performance may become poor brake system, you can still stop the
and unpredictable. vehicle by pressing the brake pedal
WARNING
After driving through water or wash- harder than normally required. How- • On some types of loose surfaces
ing the underside of the vehicle, test ever, the stopping distance may be (such as gravel, snow-covered
the brakes while driving at a slow longer. roads, etc.) the stopping distance
speed to see if they have maintained required for an ABS-equipped vehi-
their normal effectiveness. If the Brake Assist System cle may be slightly greater than for
brakes are less effective than normal, When you slam the brakes on, the brake a comparable vehicle with a con-
dry them by repeatedly applying the assist system judges as an emergency ventional brake system. With a
brakes while driving slowly until the stop and provides more powerful braking conventional brake system, skid-
brakes have regained their normal for a driver who cannot hold down the ding tires are able to “plow” the
effectiveness. brake pedal firmly. gravel or snow layer, shortening
the stopping distance, ABS mini-
NOTE: mizes this resistance effect. Allow
Power Assisted Brakes If you quickly and forcefully depress the
Your vehicle has power assisted brakes. If for extra stopping distance when
brakes, you may hear a clicking sound in driving on loose surfaces.
power assistance is lost due to a stalled
the brake pedal. This is normal and indi- • On regular paved roads, some driv-
engine or other failures, the system is still
cates that the brake assist system is acti- ers may be able to obtain slightly
fully operational on reserve power and you
vated properly. shorter stopping distances with
can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by
pressing the brake pedal once and holding conventional brake systems than
it down. The reserve power is partly used Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) with ABS.
up when you depress the brake pedal and ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec- • In both of the above conditions,
reduces each time the pedal is pressed. tronically controlling braking pressure. It ABS will still offer the advantage of
Apply smooth and even pressure to the will also help you maintain steering control helping you maintain directional
pedal. Do not pump the pedal. when braking on slippery surfaces or when control. However, remember that
braking hard. ABS will not compensate for bad
The ABS works automatically, so you do road or weather conditions or poor
not need any special braking technique. driver judgment. Use good judg-
Just push the brake pedal down without ment and do not drive faster than
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever it conditions will safely allow.
senses that the wheels are locking up. You
may feel the brake pedal pulsate while the
ABS is operating.
3-31
78KS0-37E

How the ABS Works

WARNING A computer continuously monitors wheel
speed. The computer compares the
or (Continued) changes in wheel speed when braking. If
If the warning light comes on briefly the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a
then turns off, the system is normal. skidding situation, the computer will
(1) (2)
If the warning light still stays on, change braking pressure several times
have the system inspected by your each second to prevent the wheels from
SUZUKI dealer immediately. locking. When you start your vehicle or
If the ABS system becomes inopera- when you accelerate after a hard stop, you
tive, the brake system will function as may hear a momentary motor or clicking
an ordinary brake system that has no sound as the system resets or checks
ABS. itself.
(3)
65D451
WARNING WARNING
(1) ABS warning light Type 1 The ABS may not work properly if
If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2))
(2) ABS warning light Type 2 tires or wheels other than those
and the Brake system warning light
(3) Brake system warning light specified in the owner’s manual are
(3) on the instrument panel simulta-
neously stays on or comes on when used. This is because the ABS works
WARNING driving, both anti-lock function and by comparing changes in wheel
If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2)) on rear brake force control function (pro- speed. When replacing tires or
the instrument panel comes on and portioning valve function) of the ABS wheels, use only the size and type
stays on while driving, there may be a system may have failed. If so, the rear specified in this owner’s manual.
problem with the ABS system. wheels may easily skid or the vehicle
If this happens: can even spin in the worst case when
1) Pull off the road and stop care- braking on a slippery road or when
fully. hard braking even on a dry paved
2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” road. Ask your SUZUKI dealer to
and then start the engine again. inspect the ABS system immediately.
(Continued) Drive carefully, avoiding hard braking
as much as possible.
3-32
78KS0-37E

Electronic Stability Program The ESP® has the following three systems: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-
(ESP®) (if equipped) Stability Control System tronically controlling braking pressure. It
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler The vehicle stability control system helps will also help you maintain steering control
AG. provide integrated control of systems such when braking on slippery surfaces or when
as anti-lock brakes, traction control, engine braking hard. The ABS works automati-
control, etc. This system automatically cally, so you do not have to use any special
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) controls the brakes and engine to help pre- braking technique. Just push the brake
helps to control the vehicle during corner- vent the vehicle from skidding when cor- pedal down without pumping. The ABS will
ing if front wheels or rear wheels skid. It nering on a slippery road surface or when operate whenever it senses that wheels
also assists you in maintaining traction turning the steering wheel abruptly. are locking up. You may feel the brake
while accelerating on loose or slippery pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.
road surfaces. It does this by regulating the Traction Control System (For more information on ABS, see “Brak-
engine’s output, and by selectively apply- The traction control system automatically ing” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”
ing the brakes. In addition, ESP® helps to helps prevent the spinning of wheels when section.)
avoid skidding by controlling braking pres- the vehicle is started or accelerated on
sure. slippery road surfaces. The system oper- NOTE:
ates only if it senses that some of the If the ABS system is activated, you may
WARNING wheels are spinning or beginning to lose hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating
traction. When this happens, the system in the brake pedal. This is normal and indi-
The ESP® cannot enhance the vehi-
operates the front or rear brakes and cates that the brake fluid pressure is being
cle’s driving stability in all situations
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. controlled properly.
and does not control your vehicle’s
entire braking system. The ESP® can-
not prevent accidents, including NOTE:
those resulting from excessive speed You may hear a clicking sound in the
in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe engine compartment for a few seconds
and attentive driver can prevent acci- when you start the engine or just after the
dents. The capabilities of an ESP®- vehicle begins to move. This means that
equipped vehicle must never be used the above systems are in the self-check
as a substitute for careful driving. mode. This sound does not indicate a mal-
function.
3-33
78KS0-37E

The ESP® indicator lights are described NOTE:

WARNING below: When you disconnect and re-connect the
battery, ESP® system functions other than
• The ESP® may not work properly if
tires or wheels other than those
SLIP Indicator Light ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-
tor light will blink 1 time per second. In this
specified in the Owner’s Manual are case, use the following procedure to re-
used. When replacing tires or activate the ESP® systems:
wheels, use only the size and type 1) Drive your vehicle straight ahead with-
specified in this Owner’s Manual. out tire slippage at a speed greater than
• The ESP® may not work properly if approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) for a
tires are not inflated to the recom- few seconds
mended tire inflation pressure. 2) The slip indicator light will go out and
• The ESP® may not work properly if 79K019
the ESP® systems (other than ABS) will
tires are fitted with tire chains. The SLIP indicator light in the instrument be re-activated
• The ESP® may not work properly if cluster blinks 5 times per second when one It may take more than few seconds before
the tires are excessively worn. Be of the following systems is activated. the slip indicator light goes out depending
sure to replace tires when the tread • Stability control system on the road surface condition.
wear indicators in the grooves • Traction control system
appear on the tread surface. • Hill descent control system (if equipped)
• The ESP® is not a substitute for
“ESP” Warning Light
winter tires or tire chains on a snow CAUTION
covered road.
If the SLIP indicator light comes on
and stays on while driving, there may
WARNING be a malfunction of the ESP® sys-
tems (other than ABS). You should
• The ESP® may not work properly if have the systems inspected by an
engine related parts such as the authorized SUZUKI dealer. 66J031
muffler are not equivalent to stan-
dard equipment or are extremely When the ESP® systems (other than ABS)
deteriorated. NOTE: have a system malfunction, the “ESP”
• Do not modify the vehicle’s sus- When the SLIP indicator light comes on warning light in the instrument cluster
pension since the ESP® may not and stays on while driving, indicating a comes on.
operate correctly. malfunction of the ESP® systems (other
than ABS), the brake system will function
as an ordinary ABS with no additional
ESP® functions.
3-34
78KS0-37E

“ESP OFF” Indicator Light (with hill descent control)

CAUTION
If the “ESP” warning light comes on,
or stays on while driving, there may
be a malfunction of the ESP® sys-
tems (other than ABS). You should
(1)
have the systems inspected by an
authorized SUZUKI dealer.
66J032
NOTE: You should turn the ESP® on during your

When the “ESP” warning light comes on, ordinary driving, so that you have the ben-
or stays on while driving, indicating a mal- efits of all of the ESP® systems.
function of the ESP® systems (other than It may be required to turn the ESP® sys-
ABS), the brake system will function as an tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle is
ordinary ABS that has no additional ESP® stuck in sand, mud, or snow, or when driv-
78K046
functions. ing in extreme off-road conditions where (1) “ESP OFF” switch
wheel spin is necessary.
NOTE: When the “ESP OFF” switch located at the
The information display shows the warning “ESP OFF” switch center of the instrument panel is pushed
and indicator message when this light (without hill descent control) and held to turn off the ESP® systems
comes on. (other than ABS), the “ESP OFF” indicator
light in the instrument cluster comes on.
When you push and hold the “ESP OFF”
switch again, the “ESP OFF” indicator light
will go out and all of the ESP® systems will
be activated.
NOTE:
• When the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), the
ESP® systems (other than ABS) will turn
on automatically and the “ESP OFF”
(1) indicator light will go out.
• When the transfer switch (if equipped) is
78K045 turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the
3-35
78KS0-37E

ESP® systems (other than ABS) will be Hill descent control System
canceled to provide improved vehicle (if equipped)
traction, and the “ESP OFF” indicator The hill descent control system is designed
light will come on. to reduce the driver’s workload when going
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is down steep, rough and/or slippery hills
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, brake- where the vehicle cannot decelerate
traction control can be activated. Brake- enough by engine braking alone. The hill
traction control brakes the spinning 79K084 descent control system helps to control
wheel to distribute drive power to the vehicle speed by automatically engaging
other wheels for increased climbing abil- NOTE:
the vehicle’s brakes, as needed, so you
ity or for better performance on a rolling If you push the “ESP OFF” switch when
can concentrate on steering the vehicle.
hill or a slippery surface. the transfer switch is in the “4H” position,
• If the ESP® systems operate continu- the ESP® systems will not be turned off,
and the message shown in the above illus- WARNING
ously, such as when driving on slippery
roads, the traction control functions of tration will appear on the information dis- Do not rely excessively on the hill
the ESP® systems may be canceled play. descent control system. The hill
temporarily to avoid overheating the You should turn the transfer switch to the descent control system may not con-
brake pads, and the “ESP OFF” indicator “4H LOCK” position to turn off the ESP® trol vehicle speed on a hill under all
light will come on. After a short period of systems. Refer to “Using the Transfer load or road conditions. Always be
time, the ESP® systems (other than Switch” in this section. prepared to control vehicle speed by
ABS) will turn on automatically and the applying the brakes. Failure to pay
“ESP OFF” indicator light will go out. ABS Warning Light / Brake System attention and control vehicle speed
• If your vehicle is equipped with a hill Warning Light using the brakes when necessary
descent control system and a hill hold See “Braking” in the “OPERATING YOUR may result in loss of control or an
control system, these systems will not be VEHICLE” section. accident.
turned off when the “ESP OFF” switch is
pushed to turn off the ESP® systems.
3-36
78KS0-37E

Hill descent control switch approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) when going NOTE:
down a hill. You may hear a sound coming from the
The brake/tail lights come on and the slip engine when the hill descent control sys-
indicator light blinks while the hill descent tem is activated. This sound is normal and
control system applies the brakes to main- does not indicate a malfunction.
tain the vehicle speed.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is Hill descent control Indicator Light
depressed while the hill descent control
system is activated, the system will stop
(1) working temporarily. As soon as the accel-
erator or brake pedal is released, the hill
descent control system begins to function
again if the hill descent control operating
conditions are fulfilled. However, when the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (15 mph), 79K050
79K051 the hill descent control system will be
deactivated automatically. When the hill descent control system is
(1) Hill descent control switch activated, the hill descent control indicator
To deactivate the hill descent control sys- comes on.
To activate the hill descent control system: tem, push the hill descent control switch
1) Turn the transfer switch to the “4H again. NOTE:
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” position. If any of the following conditions occur
2) Shift the gearshift lever into a forward CAUTION when the hill descent control system is
gear or reverse gear. activated, the hill descent control indicator
3) Push the hill descent control switch (1) When the hill descent control system
blinks.
when the vehicle speed is under 25 km/ is used continuously for a long time,
• The transfer switch is in the “4H” or “N”
h (15 mph). The hill descent control the temperature of the brake system
position
indicator on the instrument cluster will may increase and the hill descent
• The gearshift lever is in the “P” position
come on and the hill descent control control system may be disabled tem-
• The gearshift lever is moved to the “N”
system will be activated. porarily. The hill descent control indi-
position while driving
cator blinks to let you know the
• The vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (15
If the transfer switch is in the “4H LOCK” system is disabled. Depress the
mph)
position, vehicle speed is maintained at brake pedal and stop the vehicle in a
approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) when safe place. When the temperature of
going down a hill. the brake system goes down, the hill
If the transfer switch is in the “4L LOCK” descent control indicator will come
position, the vehicle speed is maintained at on and the system is activated again.
3-37
78KS0-37E

NOTE: Hill hold control System 2) The gearshift lever is in a forward gear
If the hill descent control indicator does not (if equipped) or reverse gear.
come on when you push the hill descent The hill hold control system is designed to 3) The parking brake is released.
control switch, there may be a problem assist you in starting to move up steep or
with the hill descent control system and/or slippery hills. When you start to move up a NOTE:
the ESP® system. Have your vehicle hill, the system helps to prevent the vehicle You may hear a sound coming from the
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI from rolling downward while you move your engine when the hill hold control system is
dealer. foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator activated. This sound is normal and does
pedal. not indicate a malfunction.
WARNING
• Do not rely excessively on the hill
hold control system. The hill hold
control system may not prevent the
vehicle from rolling downward on a
79K072
hill under all load or road condi-
79K072
If the message shown in the above illustra- tions. Always be prepared to
tion appears on the information display, depress the brake pedal to prevent If the message shown in the above illustra-
there may be a problem with the hill the vehicle from rolling downward. tion appears on the information display,
descent control system and the hill hold Failure to pay attention and there may be a problem with the hill
control system. Have your vehicle depress the brake pedal to hold the descent control system and the hill hold
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI vehicle on a hill when necessary, control system. Have your vehicle
dealer. may result in loss of control or an inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
accident. dealer.
NOTE: • Do not use the hill hold control sys-
You cannot activate the hill descent control tem to bring the vehicle to a stop NOTE:
system while this message is displayed. on a hill. The hill hold control system will not acti-
vate while this message is displayed.
The hill hold control system activates for a
maximum of about 2 seconds if your foot is
moved from the brake pedal when the fol-
lowing condition are all met.
1) The transfer switch is in a position other
than “N”.
3-38
78KS0-37E

MEMO
3-39
78KS0-37E

DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING TIPS
Important Vehicle Design Features to Know .................... 4-1
Break-In ................................................................................ 4-2
Catalytic Converter (if equipped) ....................................... 4-3
Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-4
On-Paved Road Driving ...................................................... 4-4
4
Off-Road Driving ................................................................. 4-6
60G409
78KS0-37E

Important Vehicle Design Features to Know: NO
DRIVING TIPS
Important Vehicle Design

WARNING
Features to Know
• Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.
Even though air bags are equipped WARNING
at the front seating positions, the
driver and all passengers should Your multipurpose vehicle has han-
be properly restrained at all times, dling characteristics that differ from
using the seat belts provided. Refer those of a conventional passenger
to the “Seat Belts and Child car. For the safety of you and your
Restraint Systems” section for passengers, please read the follow-
instructions on proper use of the ing section very carefully.
seat belts.
• Never drive while under the influ- Multipurpose vehicles such as your new
65D231S
ence of alcohol or other drugs. SUZUKI have higher ground clearance and
Alcohol and drugs can seriously a narrower track than conventional passen-
impair your ability to drive safely, ger cars, to make them capable of perform-
greatly increasing the risk of injury ing in a wide variety of off-road
to yourself and others. You should applications. Specific design characteris-
also avoid driving when you are tics give them a higher center of gravity
tired, sick, irritated, or under than ordinary cars. An advantage of the
stress. higher ground clearance is a better view of
the road allowing you to anticipate prob-
lems. They are not designed for cornering
at the same speed as conventional pas-
senger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satis-
factorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly may result in loss of control or vehi-
cle rollover.
Multipurpose vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
4-1
78KS0-37E

Important Vehicle Design Features to Know: NO
On-Paved Road Driving: NO
DRIVING TIPS
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is Narrower Body Width and Track Break-In
significantly more likely to die than a per- Your vehicle is narrower than the average
son wearing a seat belt. passenger car so that it can pass through
tight spaces. CAUTION
Important Differences Between The future performance and reliabil-
Your Multipurpose Vehicle and Without the essential characteristics ity of the engine depends on the care
Ordinary Passenger Cars described above: higher ground clearance, and restraint exercised during its
shorter wheelbase, and narrower body early life. It is especially important to
Higher Ground Clearance width and track -your vehicle could not pro- observe the following precautions
The higher ground clearance of your vehi- vide you with excellent off road driving per- during the initial 960 km (600 miles)
cle enables it to clear off-road obstacles, formance. However, it is also true that on- of vehicle operation.
such as rocks and tree stumps, that ordi- road driving, handling, and steering will be • After starting, do not race the
nary passenger cars can not drive over. An different from what drivers experience with engine. Warm it up gradually.
unavoidable result of this higher ground a conventional passenger car. • Avoid prolonged vehicle operation
clearance is that the vehicle also has a at a constant speed. Moving parts
higher center of gravity. Consequently, your will break in better if you vary your
vehicle will handle differently than a vehicle speed.
with a lower center of gravity. • Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid
full throttle starts.
Shorter Wheelbase • If possible, avoid hard braking,
Along with its higher ground clearance, especially during the first 320 km
your vehicle has a shorter wheelbase and (200 miles) of driving.
shorter front and rear overhangs than the • Do not drive slowly with the trans-
typical passenger car. These features mission in a high gear.
combine to allow you to drive your vehicle • Drive the vehicle at moderate
over hillcrests without hanging up on them engine speeds.
or damaging the frame and chassis com- • Do not tow a trailer during the first
ponents. The shorter wheelbase also 960 km (600 miles) of vehicle oper-
makes the steering of your vehicle more ation.
responsive than that of vehicles with longer
wheelbases.
4-2
78KS0-37E

DRIVING TIPS
Catalytic Converter damage to the catalyst and other vehicle

components.
(if equipped)
CAUTION
EXAMPLE To minimize the possibility of cata-
lyst or other vehicle damage:
• Maintain the engine in the proper
operating condition.
• In the event of an engine malfunc-
tion, particularly one involving
engine misfire or other apparent
loss of performance, have the vehi-
cle serviced promptly.
• Do not turn off the engine or inter- 54G584S
rupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in
54G236
motion. WARNING
• Do not try to start the engine by Be careful where you park and drive;
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to pushing or towing the vehicle, or
minimize the amount of harmful pollutants the catalytic converter and other
coasting down a hill. exhaust components can get very
in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded • Do not idle the engine with any
fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic hot. As with any vehicle, do not park
spark plug wires disconnected or or operate this vehicle in areas where
converters is prohibited, because lead removed, such as during diagnos-
deactivates the pollutant-reducing compo- combustible materials such as dry
tic testing. grass or leaves can come in contact
nents of the catalyst system. • Do not idle the vehicle for pro- with a hot exhaust system.
The converter is designed to last the life of longed periods if idling seems
the vehicle under normal usage and when rough or there are other malfunc-
unleaded fuel is used. No special mainte- tions.
nance is required on the converter. How- • Do not allow the fuel tank to get
ever, it is very important to keep the engine near the empty level.
properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which
can result from an improperly tuned
engine, may cause overheating of the cat-
alyst. This may result in permanent heat
4-3
78KS0-37E

Off-Road Driving: NO
DRIVING TIPS
Improving Fuel Economy Keep the air cleaner clean On-Paved Road Driving
The following instructions will help you The data of accidents show that most roll-
improve fuel economy. EXAMPLE over accidents for multi-purpose vehicles
are caused when a driver loses control of
Avoid excessive idling
the vehicle and leaves the paved portion of
If you are to wait for more than a minute
the roadway striking a ditch, curb or other
while you are parked, stop the engine and
off-road object that causes the vehicle to
start it again later. When warming up a overturn. The following driving practices
cold engine, allow the engine to idle until
may reduce the risk of rollover.
the temperature gauge pointer comes up
to the “C” position (if the idling is not pro-
Vehicle Slides Off-Road
hibited). In this position, the engine is suffi-
You can reduce the risk of this kind of roll-
ciently warm for starting off. over accident by always keeping the vehi-
Avoid “fast” starts cle under control. Typically, drivers lose
Fast starts away from lights or stop signs control of vehicles, often resulting in roll-
60A183S
will consume fuel unnecessarily and over accidents, when the driver is impaired
shorten engine life. Start off slowly. A dirty air cleaner will cause the carbure- because of alcohol or other drugs, falls
tion system to supply too much fuel to the asleep at the wheel or is otherwise inatten-
Avoid unnecessary stops engine for the amount of air being sup- tive, or is driving too fast for the road condi-
Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop- plied. The result is waste of fuel due to tions.
ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed incomplete combustion.
whenever possible. Slowing down and then Rollovers On the Roadway
accelerating again uses more fuel. Keep weight to a minimum
The heavier the load, the more fuel the If, for any reason, your vehicle slides side-
Keep a steady cruising speed vehicle consumes. Take out any luggage ways or spins out of control at highway
Keep as constant a speed as road and traf- or cargo when it is not necessary. speeds, while on the paved portion of the
fic conditions will permit. roadway, the risk of rollover is greatly
Keep tire pressures correct increased. This condition can be created
Underinflation of the tires can waste fuel when two or more wheels drop off onto the
due to increased running resistance of the shoulder and you steer sharply in an
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct attempt to reenter the roadway. To reduce
pressure shown on the label on the driver’s the risk of rollover in these circumstances,
side door or the driver’s door lock pillar. if conditions permit, you should hold the
steering wheel firmly and slow down
before pulling back into the travel lanes
with controlled steering movements.
4-4
78KS0-37E

DRIVING TIPS
All Types of Rollover Accidents relative to conventional passenger cars.

As with many kinds of automobile acci- Remember, small multipurpose vehicles CAUTION
dents, rollovers can be greatly reduced by have more responsive steering and a
doing what all prudent drivers should do, higher center of gravity than conventional Do not operate your vehicle in “4H
i.e., don’t drink and drive, don’t drive when passenger cars. If at all possible, avoid LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry, hard
tired and don’t do anything behind the making sharp turns in your vehicle. surfaces. Operating your vehicle in
wheel that could cause a loss of attention “4H LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry,
to the driving task. Slow Down on Curves hard surfaces puts severe stress to
Learn to approach curves cautiously and the drive train, especially during tight
Additional guidelines are set out below for at a conservative speed. Do not attempt to cornering, and can damage it. Also,
your on-road driving. take curves at the same speeds that you you may have some difficulty steer-
would in a vehicle with a lower center of ing.
Know Your Vehicle gravity. Just as you would not drive a
Take time to familiarize yourself with the sports car on a trail, you should not NOTE:
unique handling characteristics of your attempt to drive your vehicle around curves Avoid operating your vehicle in “4H LOCK”
vehicle by first driving around in an area like a sports car. or “4L LOCK” on wet pavement as much
away from traffic. Practice turning the vehi- as possible. Operating your vehicle in “4H
cle at a variety of speeds and in different Slow Down and Use Caution on Slip- LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on wet pavement
directions. Get a feel for the greater steer- pery Roads may cause severe damage to the drive
ing response that your vehicle has over a Under wet road conditions you should train.
conventional car. drive at a lower speed than on dry roads
due to possible slippage of tires during NOTE:
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times braking. When driving on icy, snowcov- Operating your vehicle in “4H” on dry and
The driver and all passengers should be ered, or muddy roads, reduce your speed tight corner may cause some vibration on
properly restrained at all times, using the and avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt your vehicle. This is not caused by the
seat belts provided. Refer to the “Seat braking, or sharp steering movements. vehicle malfunction, but caused by working
Belts and Child Restraint Systems” section Use 4-wheel drive high range (4H) (if of the limited slip differential gear in the
for instructions on proper use of the seat equipped) for better traction. center differential.
belts.
Don’t Make Sharp Turns

As mentioned before, small multipurpose
vehicles have specific design characteris-
tics that allow them to perform in a wide
variety of applications. These characteris-
tics also change the cornering behavior
4-5
78KS0-37E

DRIVING TIPS
Off-Road Driving Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times

CAUTION Your vehicle has specific design character-
You and your passengers should use the
seat belts at all times when driving off-
Unevenly worn tires can cause prob- istics for off-road driving. When you leave
road. For proper seat belt use, refer to the
lems in the operation of the transfer the paved road, you will encounter driving
“Seat Belts” section in this manual.
switch. Be sure to rotate the tires surfaces of all kinds which may change
according to the maintenance sched- continually as you drive. It is important
Avoid Sudden Reactions in Mud, Ice, or
ule. Refer to “Tires” and “Mainte- when driving off-road to follow the guide-
Snow
nance Schedule” in the lines below.
Be careful when off-road conditions are
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” slippery. Reduce your speed and avoid
section for proper tire rotation proce- Use Caution on Steep Inclines
sudden movements of the vehicle. If your
dures. Always inspect hills before you attempt to
vehicle is equipped with the transfer
drive up them. Know what is on the other
switch, be aware that driving in deep snow
side and how you will get back down. If you
or mud can cause a loss of traction and an
have any doubt that it is safe, do not
increase in the resistance to the vehicle’s
attempt to drive over a hill. Never drive
forward motion. Use 4WD low gear (4L)
your vehicle up an extremely steep incline.
and maintain a steady but moderate speed
Coming down a steep hill can be trickier with a light touch on the steering wheel
than getting up one. Keep the vehicle and brakes.
heading straight down the hill and use low
gear. Do not lock the brakes. If the vehicle Do not drive in the field covered with
begins to slide, accelerate slightly to regain grown grass
steering control. If you drive in the field covered with grass,
it may cause unexpected accident or vehi-
Do not Drive Across the Side of Hills cle damage by getting caught in grown
Driving across the side of a hill can be grass.
extremely hazardous. Most of the vehicle’s
weight will be transferred to the downhill Tire Chains
tires, which could result in the vehicle roll- If you must use tire chains to increase tire
ing sideways. Whenever possible, avoid traction, observe the following precautions:
this potential hazard. Also, if you have to • Use SUZUKI genuine tire chains or
exit your vehicle on a side-hill, always get equivalent small link chain or wire chain.
out on the uphill side. • Choose a safe place away from traffic to
install the chain.
• When installing the chains carefully fol-
low the manufacture’s instructions.
4-6
78KS0-37E

DRIVING TIPS
• Install the chains on the rear tires. Do not drive through deep or rushing
• With the chains on, drive only at slow WARNING water
and moderate speeds. Driving in deep or rushing water can be
• Do not allow anyone to stand near hazardous. You could lose control of the
the vehicle when you are rocking it,
CAUTION and do not spin the wheels faster
vehicle and the occupants could drown.
Also, your vehicle could be seriously dam-
If you hear the chains hitting against than an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph) aged. To avoid these risks, observe the fol-
the vehicle body while driving, stop on the speedometer. Personal lowing instructions and precautions.
and tighten them. injury and/or vehicle damage may • Do not drive through deep or rushing
result from spinning the wheels too water. Deep or rushing water, such as
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck fast. fast-moving streams or floodwaters,
If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, or • Be sure to turn the transfer switch could carry your vehicle away from your
sand, follow the directions below: from “4H” to “4H LOCK” or “4L intended path. The water is too deep if it
LOCK” when the tires slip in “4H”. covers your wheel hubs, axles, or
1) (For vehicles equipped with transfer The continuing tires slip in “4H”
switch) Turn the transfer switch to “4H exhaust tailpipe. Know the depth of the
can cause the limited slip differen- water before you attempt to drive
LOCK” or “4L LOCK”. tial gear damage in the center dif-
2) Shift the transmission back and forth through it.
ferential. • If water blocks the tailpipe, the engine
between a forward range (or first gear
for manual transmission) and reverse. may not start or run. If the water is deep
This will create a rocking motion which CAUTION enough to get drawn into the engine
may give you enough momentum to intake system, the engine will be badly
free the vehicle. Press gently on the Release the accelerator pedal when damaged.
accelerator to keep wheel spin to a min- operating the gearshift lever. Operat- • Submerged brakes will have poor brak-
imum. Remove your foot from the ing the lever with the engine racing ing performance. Drive slowly and care-
accelerator while shifting. can damage the gears. fully. Driving slowly will also help avoid
Do not race the engine. Excessive water splashing onto the ignition system,
wheel spin will cause the tires to dig which could cause the engine to stall.
CAUTION • Even when driving through shallow or
deeper, making it more difficult to free
the vehicle. Do not continue rocking the vehicle still waters, drive carefully since the
3) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few for more than a few minutes. Pro- water may be hiding ground hazards
minutes of rocking, get another vehicle longed rocking can cause engine such as holes, ditches, or bumps.
to pull you out. overheating, transmission or trans-
fer case damage, or tire damage.
4-7
78KS0-37E

DRIVING TIPS
WARNING WARNING
In addition to following the driving (Continued)
tips in this section, it is important to • After driving through water, mud,
observe the following precautions for or sandy ground, test the brakes
on-road and off-road driving. while driving at a slow speed to see
• Driver and passengers should wear if they have maintained their nor-
seat belts at all times. mal effectiveness. If the brakes are
• Do not let anyone else drive your less effective than normal, dry
vehicle unless they are also aware them by repeatedly applying the
of the vehicle characteristics and brakes while driving slowly until
handling differences described in the brakes have regained their nor-
this section. mal effectiveness.
• Avoid loaning your vehicle to any- • Do not use “4H LOCK” or “4L
one unless you accompany them. LOCK” drive for normal driving on
• Make sure your tires are in good dry, hard surfaced roads.
condition and always maintain the • After extended operation in mud,
specified tire pressure. Refer to sand, or water, have the brakes
“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND inspected by your authorized
MAINTENANCE” section for SUZUKI dealer as soon as possi-
details. ble.
• Do not use tires other than those
specified by SUZUKI. Never use dif-
ferent sizes or types of tires on the
front and rear wheels. For informa-
tion regarding the specified tires,
refer to the “SPECIFICATIONS”
section.
• Never use oversized tires or spe-
cial shock absorbers and springs
to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This
will raise the center of gravity of
the vehicle and change its handling
characteristics.
(Continued)
4-8
78KS0-37E

DRIVING TIPS
MEMO
4-9
78KS0-37E

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System
(Climate Control) ................................................................. 5-1
Radio Antenna (if equipped) .............................................. 5-8
Audio Systems (type A) ...................................................... 5-8
Audio Systems (type B) ...................................................... 5-32
Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-49
Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-50
5
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-51
Interior Light Switch ........................................................... 5-51
Luggage Compartment Light ............................................. 5-52
Spot Light ............................................................................ 5-53
Accessory Socket (if equipped) ......................................... 5-53
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray (if equipped) ..................... 5-54
Sunroof (if equipped) .......................................................... 5-55
60G407 Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-57
Coat Hooks (if equipped) .................................................... 5-58
Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-58
Eyeglasses Holder (if equipped) ........................................ 5-58
Cup Holder and Storage Bin (if equipped) ........................ 5-59
Front Seat Back Pocket (if equipped) ............................... 5-60
Shopping Hook (if equipped) ............................................. 5-61
Armrest (if equipped) .......................................................... 5-61
Luggage Compartment Cover ............................................ 5-62
Underfloor Bins (if equipped) ............................................ 5-65
Luggage Restraint Loops (if equipped) ............................ 5-65
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped) ............... 5-66
Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-67
78KS0-37E

Parking Brake Lever: 6
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System 1. Windshield defroster outlet

2. Side defroster outlet
(Climate Control) 3. Side outlet
4. Center outlet
Air Outlet 5. Floor outlet
EXAMPLE Center outlet
1
2 1 Open EXAMPLE
3
4 2
3
Close
5
64J199
5
5
66J250
5-1
78KS0-37E

Pedal: 6
Side outlet Description of Controls

(8)
(1) (2)
(7) (5)
(6) (4)
(9)
(3)
78K023
(1) Temperature selector

(2) Blower speed selector
(3) Air intake selector
(4) Air flow selector
(5) Defrost switch
63J045 (6) “OFF” switch
When “Open”, air comes out from the side (7) “AUTO” switch
outlets regardless of the air flow selector (8) Air conditioning switch
position. (9) LCD display
5-2
78KS0-37E

Gearshift Lever: 10
Fuel Filler Cap: 5
Temperature selector (1) Air conditioning switch (8) Blower speed selector (2)
(1) (2)
A/C: OFF A/C: ON
(8)
78K047 78K024 78K048
Turn the temperature selector (1) to adjust The air conditioning switch (8) is used to The blower speed selector (2) is used to
the temperature. turn on and off the air conditioning system. turn on the blower and to select blower
To turn on the air conditioning system, speed.
push in the switch and “A/C” will appear on
If the “AUTO” switch (7) is pushed, the
the LCD display. To turn off the air condi-
blower speed will vary automatically as the
tioning system, push in the switch again
and “A/C” will go off. climate control system maintains the
selected temperature.
5-3
78KS0-37E

Fuel Filler Cap: 5
Air intake selector (3) “FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR” Air flow selector (4)
are selected alternately each time the air
intake selector is pushed.
NOTE:
If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an
extended period of time, the air in the vehi-
cle can become contaminated. Therefore,
(a) (b) you should occasionally select “FRESH
AIR”. (4)
(3)
(c) (d) (e) (f)
78K025 78K026
Push the air intake selector (3) to change Push the air flow selector (4) to change
between the following modes. among the following functions. The indica-
tion of the selected mode appears on the
If the “AUTO” switch (7) is pushed, the air LCD display.
intake will vary automatically as the climate
control system maintains the selected tem- If the “AUTO” switch (7) is pushed, the air
perature. flow will vary automatically as the climate
control system maintains the selected tem-
RECIRCULATED AIR (a) perature.
When this mode is selected, outside air is
shut off and inside air is recirculated. This
mode is suitable when driving through an
area with polluted air such as a tunnel, or
when attempting to quickly cool down the
vehicle.
FRESH AIR (b)
When this mode is selected, outside air is
introduced.
5-4
78KS0-37E

Folding Rear Seat: 3
Ventilation (c) Heat (e) Defrost switch (5)
64J069 64J071 (5)
Temperature-controlled air comes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the center and side air outlets. the floor outlets and the side outlets, a
small amount of air comes out of the wind-
Bi-level (d) shield defroster outlets and the side
defroster outlets.
Heat & defrost (f) 78K050
Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the

defroster.
64J070
Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and cooler air comes out
64J072
of the center and side outlets. When the
temperature selector (1) is in the fully Temperature-controlled air comes out of
COLD position or fully HOT position, how- the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
ever, the air from the floor outlets and the outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
air from the center and side outlets will be side outlets.
the same temperature.
5-5
78KS0-37E

Defrost System Operating Instructions inside temperature below outside tempera-

ture.
Automatic operation
To turn the climate control system off, push
the “OFF” switch (6).
NOTE:
If the “AUTO” on the LCD display blinks,
66J241 there is a problem in the heating system
(7)
and/or air conditioning system. You should
Temperature-controlled air comes out of have the system inspected by an autho-
the windshield defroster outlets, the side rized SUZUKI dealer.
defroster outlets and the side outlets.
NOTE:
NOTE: • To find the temperature at which you are
When the defrost switch (5) is pushed to most comfortable, start with the 25°C
turn on the defroster, the air conditioning (6) (75°F) setting.
system will come on and the “FRESH AIR” 78K051 • If you turn the temperature selector (1)
mode will be selected automatically. In until “HI” or “LO” appears on the LCD
very cold weather, however, the air condi- You can let the climate control system work
automatically. To set the system for fully- display, the climate control system will
tioning system will not turn on. operate at the maximum cooling or heat-
automatic operation, follow the procedure
below. ing and the blower will run at full speed.
• To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather
1) Start the engine. or hot air in hot weather, the system will
2) Push the “AUTO” switch (7). delay turning on the blower until warmed
3) Set the desired temperature by turning or chilled air is available.
the temperature selector (1). • If your vehicle has been left in the sun
The blower speed, air intake and air flow with the windows closed, it will cool
are controlled automatically to maintain the faster if you open the windows briefly.
set temperature. • Even under the automatic operation, you
can set individual selectors to the man-
You can use the air conditioning switch (8) ual mode. The manually selected func-
to manually turn the air conditioner on or tions are maintained, and the other
off according to your preference. When functions remain under automatic opera-
you turn the air conditioning switch off, the tion.
climate control system cannot lower the
5-6
78KS0-37E

• To return the blower speed selector (2), Maintenance

air intake selector (3), and air flow selec- If you do not use the air conditioner for a
tor (4) to automatic operation, push the long period, such as during winter, it may
“AUTO” switch. not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
(F)
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
(G) and helps protect the internal components.
Your air conditioner is equipped with air fil-
ters. Clean or replace them as specified in
64J074
the “Maintenance Schedule” in the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-
NOTE: tion. Have this job done by your SUZUKI
EXAMPLE If you need maximum defrosting: dealer as the lower glove box must be low-
• push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the ered for this job.
64J080
defroster (the air conditioning system will
Be careful not to cover the interior temper- come on and the “FRESH AIR” mode will NOTE:
ature sensor (F) located between the be selected automatically), Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
steering wheel and the climate control • set the blower speed selector to HIGH, refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
panel, or the solar sensor (G) located at • adjust the temperature selector to the “R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around
the top of the driver’s side dashboard. “HI” indication on the LCD display, and 1993 for automotive applications. Other
These sensors are used by the automatic • adjust the side outlets so the air blows refrigerants are available, including recy-
system to regulate temperature. on the side windows. cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
in your vehicle.
Manual operation
You can manually control the climate con- CAUTION
trol system. Set the selectors to the
desired positions. Using the wrong refrigerant may
damage your air conditioning sys-
tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
replace the R-134a with other refrig-
erants.
5-7
78KS0-37E

Radio Antenna (if equipped) Audio Systems (type A) Type 2

There are two types of audio system as
shown below:
Type 1
78K093
63J055
AM/FM 6-CD PLAYER
The radio antenna is removable. To WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL
remove the antenna, turn it counterclock-
wise. To reinstall the antenna, turn it clock- 78K092
wise firmly by hand.
AM/FM CD PLAYER
WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the radio
antenna:
• Remove the antenna when using an
automatic car wash.
• Remove the antenna when the
antenna hits anything such as a
low ceiling in a parking garage or
putting a car cover over your car.
5-8
78KS0-37E

Precautions Cautions on Handling Never touch the surface.

• When the inside of the car is very cold
and the player is used soon after switch-
ing on the heater, moisture may form on
the disc or the optical parts of the player
and proper playback may not be possi-
ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe it (A)
off with a soft cloth. If moisture forms on
the optical parts of the player, do not use 52D274 52D347
the player for about one hour, this will
allow the condensation to disappear nor- This unit has been designed specifically for To remove fingermarks and dust, use a
mally. playback of compact discs bearing the soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which mark (A). the center of the compact disc to the cir-
cause severe vibrations may cause No other discs can be played. cumference.
sound to skip.
• This unit uses a precision mechanism. Removing the disc Proper way to hold
Even in the event that trouble arises, the compact disc
never open the case, disassemble the (B)
(C) (B)
unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.
Please bring the unit to an authorized
SUZUKI dealer or a Clarion service
Department.
52D275 52D277
To remove the compact disc from its stor- New discs may have some roughness
age case, press down on the center of the around the edges. The unit may not work
case and lift the disc out, holding it care- or the sound may skip if such discs are
fully by the edges. used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to
remove the roughness (C) from edges of
Always handle the compact disc by the the disc before insertion inside the unit.
edges.
5-9
78KS0-37E

Armrest: 3
NOTE:
• Do not use commercially available CD
protection sheets or discs equipped with
stabilizers, etc.
These may get caught in the internal
mechanism and damage the disc.
• CD-R discs may not be able to playback
52D348 52D350 in this unit due to the recording condi-
tions.
Never stick labels on the surface of the Do not use compact discs that have large • CD-RW discs can not playback in this
compact disc or mark the surface with a scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. unit.
pencil or pen. Use of such discs will cause damage or
prevent the system from operating prop-
erly.
52D349
Do not use any solvents such as commer-

52D351
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,
or thinner to clean compact discs. Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-
light or any heat source.
5-10
78KS0-37E

Armrest: 3
Sun Visor: 5
Basic Operations Display

(A)
Type 1 AM/FM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL
(5)
(6)
79K086
(7)
(1) (2) (1) Power on/off knob
Volume control knob
(2) Tone/balance/fader control knob
(3) Preset button 5
(4) Preset button 6
(5) Mute button
(3) (4)
(6) Clock button H
(7) Clock button M
Type 2 AM/FM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (A) Clock display
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
78K094
5-11
78KS0-37E

Interior Light Switch: 7
Turning power on/off NOTE: Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-
Press the power on/off knob (1). When the clock has not been set, the time trol)
The unit starts in the function mode it was “12:00” will flash in the display. The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function
in when the power was turned off last. Clock reset is effected as follows: automatically adjusts (increases/
• When minutes are between 00 and 29, decreases) the sound volume in accor-
Adjusting the volume the clock will reset to the current hour. dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control
Turn the volume control knob (1). (example: 12:23 ➔ 12:00) is provided with three selectable levels
Turning it clockwise increases the volume; • When minutes are between 30 and 59, (LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume
turning it counterclockwise decreases the the clock will reset to the next hour. adjustment increases together with the
volume. (example: 12:38 ➔ 1:00) LEVEL number,
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control
NOTE: Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode
While driving, adjust the volume to an 1) Press the tone/balance/fader control is selected.
extent that sound and/or noise coming knob (2). 2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control
from outside the car can be heard. Each time it is pressed, sound adjust- knob (2) to select the desired AVC
ment is changed as follows: adjustment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL
Mute 2)
1) Press the MUTE button (5).
Press the MUTE button (5) again, it Bass adjustment (BASS 0) Adjusting the contrast of the display
returns to the original volume. 1) Press the tone/balance/fader/control
knob (2) and preset button 5 (3), preset
Adjusting the clock Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0) button 6 (4) simultaneously.
1) Press the clock button H (6) to adjust 2) To adjust the contrast of the display,
the hours. Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0) turn the power on/off knob (1).
Press the clock button M (7) to adjust
the minutes. Fader adjustment (FADER 0) Cancel the dimmer condition
2) Hold the button depressed to automati- Each time you press the power on/off knob
cally increment the number. (1) for two seconds with the lighting switch
3) To reset the clock to an hour signal, AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2) on, the background brightness of the audio
press the clock button H (6) while hold- display will switch between normal and
ing the clock button M (7) depressed. Original mode dimmed.
66J224
2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control

knob (2) to adjust the sound.
5-12
78KS0-37E

Spot Light: 7
Luggage Compartment Light: 7
Listening to the Radio Display

(C)
(6) (A) (B) (D)
(2) 66J097
(3)
(1) (1) Band switch button (FM/AM)
(4) (2) Seek up button
(3) Seek down button
(7)
(4) Manual tuning knob
(5) Preset buttons (1 to 6)
(6) Auto store button (AS)
(7) Scan button (SCAN)
(5)
(A) Band
(B) Preset channel number
Type 2 AM/FM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (C) Stereo indicator
(D) Frequency
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(6) (7)
(5)
78K095
5-13
78KS0-37E

Front Seat Heater: 8
Selecting the reception band Auto store Scan tuning

Press the band switch button (1). Press and hold the auto store button (6) for 1) Press the scan button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the recep- 2 seconds or longer. Stations are automatically sought for in
tion band is switched as follows: Six stations in total are automatically a sequential order, starting from a sta-
stored to the preset buttons (5) in sequen- tion being currently received, and scan
tial order, starting from the lower frequen- stops for 5 seconds at a frequency
cies. where there is a station available.
2) Press the scan button (7) again to stop
NOTE: scanning at the frequency being cur-
• When the auto store is performed, the rently received.
station previously stored in the memory
66J098 at the position is overwritten. Receiving a stereo broadcast station
• When there are fewer than 6 stations If a stereo broadcast station is received,
Seek tuning that can be stored even if 2 rounds of the stereo indicator will light.
Press the seek up button (2) or the seek auto store operation are performed, the
down button (3). stations previously stored at the remain-
The unit stops searching for a station at a ing preset buttons (5) are not overwrit-
frequency where a broadcast station is ten.
available.
Manual tuning
Turn the manual tuning knob (4).
The frequency being received is displayed.
Preset memory
1) Select the desired station.
2) Select the preset button (5) to which
you want to store the station and press
and hold the button for 2 seconds or
longer.
5-14
78KS0-37E

Assist Grips: 3
Coat Hooks:
Sunroof: 5, 8
Radio Reception Listening to a CD

Radio reception can be affected by envi- CAUTION
ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio
signal’s power and distance from the sta- • Never insert your finger or hand
tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may into the CD insertion slot. Never
interfere or deflect radio reception, causing insert foreign objects.
poor reception. Poor reception or radio • Never insert a CD with glue coming
(A)
static can also be caused by electric cur- out from adhesive tape or a rental
rent from overhead wires or high voltage CD label or with a trace indicating
power lines. 52D274 that adhesive tape or a rental CD
label has been removed. This may
• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)
cause the CD not to eject or result
cannot be used.
in a malfunction.
• Some discs previously recorded in CD-
R\CD-RW format may not be used.
52D291
• A CD is inserted with its label facing

upward.
• When there is a CD already loaded in
the unit, another CD cannot be loaded at
the same time. Do not use force when
inserting the CD into the CD insertion
slot.
• If a blank disc (non recorded CD-R) is
loaded in the unit, the disc will be
ejected.
5-15
78KS0-37E

Sunroof: 5, 8
Type 1 Display
AM/FM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built in CD Player)
(D)
(A) (B) (C)
66J100
(1) CD insertion slot

(2) CD eject button
(1) (3) Disc button (CD)
(2) (4) Track up button/Fast forward button
(5) Track down button/Rewind button
(4) (6) Repeat button (RPT)
(5)
(3)
(A) Mode indicator
(B) Track number
(C) Play time
(6)
(D) Repeat indicator
78K096
5-16
78KS0-37E

Sunroof: 5, 8
NOTE: Loading a CD Selecting a track

About Single CDs (8 cm CDs) Insert a CD in the CD insertion slot (1). • Press the track up button (4) to listen to
• No adapter is required to play a single When a CD is loaded, play starts and the the next track.
CD. CD indicator (A) lights. • Press the track down button (5) twice to
• A single CD is inserted from the center listen to the previous track.
of the CD insertion slot. Ejecting a CD When the track down button (5) is
• Since an ejected single CD is not auto- Press the CD eject button (2). pressed once, the track being currently
matically reloaded, be sure to remove If you left a CD ejected for a period of played will return to the beginning.
the ejected single CD. about 15 seconds, it will be automatically
drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func- Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
tion) • Hold in the fast forward button (4) to
advance a track rapidly.
The backup eject function: • Hold in the rewind button (5) to rewind a
This function allows you to eject a CD with track.
the power turned off by pressing the CD
eject button (2). Repeat play
Press the repeat button (6).
CAUTION Each time the button is pressed, repeat
If you forcefully try to push an ejected play mode changes as follows:
CD inside the unit before auto reload-
ing, the disc surface might be
scratched. TRACK REPEAT
Listening to a CD
When a CD is inserted, it is automatically OFF
played back.
When a CD is already inside the unit, 64J287
press the disc button (3) to play back the • TRACK REPEAT
CD. When a CD is inside the unit, the CD The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in
indicator (A) is lit on the display unit. the display for 2 seconds and then the
repeat indicator (D) lights.
The track currently being played is
played repeatedly.
5-17
78KS0-37E

Engine Hood: 5
Type 2 Display
AM/FM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Changer)
(F)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
66J102
(3)
(1) Load button (LOAD)
(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)
(1) (4) (3) CD insertion slot
(6)
(4) CD eject button
(7)
(5) Disc button (CD)
(5) (6) Track up button/Fast forward button
(8) Repeat button (RPT)
(8)
(A) Mode indicator
(B) Disc number
(C) Track number
(D) Play time
(2) (E) CD indicator
(F) Repeat indicator
78K097
5-18
78KS0-37E

Cup Holder and Storage Bin: 3
NOTE: Loading one CD Loading multiple CDs

About Single CDs (8 cm CDs) 1) Press the load button (1), then press 1) Press the load button (1) for 2 seconds
• Since the unit is not compatible with a one of the disc select buttons (2) that or longer.
single CD, do not load it into the unit. corresponds to the slot into which you The indication “CD ALL” appears in the
• Keep in mind the fact that a single CD want to load a CD. display, and then the indication “In” and
cannot be played even using a single CD a disc number in the CD indicator will
adaptor for the unit. blink for about 15 seconds.
• When a single CD is loaded into the unit 2) Load a CD into the CD insertion slot
accidentally, it will be ejected immedi- (3).
ately. Please be sure to remove it. 3) The indication “In” and the next disc
If you forcefully try to push it into the unit number will blink in the display. Load
without removing it, the CD cannot be the next CD.
ejected. This will result in a damage to 66J143 4) After loading the required number of
the mechanism. Please never do this. CD’s, press any disc select button (2) to
Both the indication “In” and the selected select the desired CD to listen to. If no
disc number in the CD indicator will blink select button is pressed, play will start
for about 15 seconds. from the first loaded CD.
2) Load the CD into the CD insertion slot Only the numbers in the CD indicator that
(3). When the CD is loaded, play starts. correspond to the loaded slots will light.
The disk number in the CD indicator will
light. Ejecting one CD
1) Select the CD you want to remove with
CAUTION the disc select buttons (2).
You can load a CD only while the indi- 2) Press the CD eject button (4).
cation “In” is blinking for about 15 If you leave the ejected CD without
seconds. During that period, the removing it, it will be drawn into the unit
shutter located in the depth of the CD automatically after about 15 seconds.
insertion slot (3) is opened. After 15 (Auto reload function)
seconds time has elapsed, the indi- The buck up eject mechanism:
cation “In” disappears from the dis- This function allows you to eject the CD
play and the shutter closes, making it loaded in the unit with the unit turned off
impossible to load a CD. If you try to only by pressing the CD eject button (4).
load the CD with the shutter closed,
the CD may damage the shutter.
Never do this.
5-19
78KS0-37E

Cup Holder and Storage Bin: 3
Eyeglasses Holder:
Ejecting all the CDs Listening to a CD Repeat play

Press the CD eject button (4) for 2 seconds 1) When a CD is inserted, it is automati- Press the repeat button (8).
or longer. All the CDs will be ejected from cally played back. Each time the button is pressed, repeat
the unit in a sequential manner. When a CD is already inside the unit, play mode changes as follows:
• Please prepare a location where press the disc button (5) to play back
removed CDs can be stored. the CD. When a CD is inside the unit,
• If you leave the ejected CD without the CD indicator (A) is lit on the display TRACK REPEAT
removing it, it will be drawn into the unit unit.
automatically after about 15 seconds. 2) If you want to play another CD, select it
(Auto reload function) with the disc select buttons (2). OFF DISC REPEAT
Play starts from the point on the disc
The buck up eject mechanism: that the unit played last (Last position
This function allows you to eject the CD 66J144
memory).
loaded in the unit with the unit turned off NOTE:
only by pressing the CD eject button (4). Selecting a track This operation should be performed within
• Press the track up button (6) to listen to 2 seconds.
CAUTION the next track.
• Press the track down button (7) twice to To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-
If you try to push an ejected CD
listen to the previous track. ton (8) several times to change the repeat
inside the unit forcibly before auto
When the track down button (7) is play mode to OFF.
reloading, the disc surface might be
scratched. pressed once, the track being currently
played will return to the beginning. • TRACK REPEAT
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track the display for 2 seconds and then the
• Hold in the fast forward button (6) to repeat indicator (F) lights.
advance a track rapidly. The track currently being played is
• Hold in the rewind button (7) to rewind a played repeatedly.
track. • DISC REPEAT
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in
the display for 2 seconds and then the
repeat indicator (F) lights.
When all the tracks on the disc currently
being played finish playing, play starts
again at the beginning of the disc.
5-20
78KS0-37E

Accessory Socket: 8
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray: 3, 8
Listening to an MP3/WMA Disc Display (Type 1)

(D) (E) (F)
(A) (B) (C)
66J104
(3)
(4) Display (Type 2)
(5)
(D) (E) (F)
(1)
(2)
(A) (B) (C) (G)
66J105
Type 2 AM/FM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (1) Sound control knob
(3) Track up button/Fast forward button
(5) Display button (DISP)
(A) Folder number

(3) (B) Track number
(4) (C) Play time
(5)
(D) Repeat indicator
(1) (E) WMA indicator
(2) (F) MP3 indicator
(G) CD indicator
78K098
5-21
78KS0-37E

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray: 3, 8
Frame Hooks: 5, 6
What is MP3/WMA? WMA • You may encounter trouble in playing

MP3 (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer-III) and WMA • It is recommended to set the bit rate to MP3/WMA files or displaying the infor-
(Windows MediaTM Audio) are the com- “64 kbps or more” and “fixed”. mation of MP3/WMA files recorded with
pression formats of digital audio. The • Do not set the copy protect attribute on certain writing software or CD recorders.
former is developed by MPEG (Motion Pic- the WMA file to enable this unit to play • This unit does not have a play list func-
ture Experts Group), and the latter is back. tion.
developed by Microsoft Corporation. Using • Although Multi-session recording is sup-
these compression formats, you can NOTE: ported, the use of Disc-at-Once is rec-
record the contents of about 10 music CDs Never assign the “.mp3”, or “.wma” file ommended.
on a single CD media (This figures refer to name extension to a file that is not in the
data recorded on a 650 MB CD-R or CD- MP3/WMA format. This may not only pro- Compression formats
RW at a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a duce noise from the speaker damage, but
MP3
sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz). also damage your hearing.
• Bit rate
MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 32 k - 320 kbps
Points to remember when making Recording MP3/WMA files on a CD-
MPEG2 Audio Layer III : 8 k - 160 kbps
MP3/WMA files media
• Sampling frequency
• You are recommended to minimize the
Common MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 44.1 k/48 k/32
chances of making a disc that contains
• High bit rate and high sampling fre- kHz
both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA files.
quency are recommended for high qual- MPEG2 Audio Layer III : 22.05 k/24 k/16
• If CD-DA files are on the same disc as
ity sounds. kHz
MP3 or WMA files, the songs may not
• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not play in the intended order, or some WMA (Ver.7, Ver.8, Ver. 9*)
recommended because playing time is songs may not play at all. • Bit rate
not displayed properly and sound may • When storing MP3 data and WMA data 32 k - 192 kbps
be skipped. on the same disc, use different folders • Sampling frequency
• The playback sound quality differs for each data. 44.1 k/48 k/32 kHz
depending on the encoding circum- • Do not record files other than MP3/WMA * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
stances. For details, refer to the user files and unnecessary folder on a disc. not supported.
manual of your own encoding software • The name of an MP3/WMA file should
and writing software. be added by rules as shown in the fol- Supported file systems
lowing descriptions and also comply with ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Apple Extension
MP3
the rules of each file system. to ISO 9660, Joliet, Romeo
• It is recommended to set the bit rate to
“128 kbps or more” and “fixed”. • The file extension “.mp3” or “.wma” Maximum number of files/folders
should be assigned to each file depend- • Maximum number of files:
ing on the file format. CD Player: 999 (files + folders)
6-CD Player: 512 (files + folders)
5-22
78KS0-37E

Tire Changing Tool: 3, 5
Shopping Hook:
• Maximum number of files in one folder: NOTE: Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

255 This operation should be performed within • Hold in the fast forward button (3) to
• Maximum depth of trees: 8 2 seconds. advance a track rapidly.
• Maximum number of folders: 255 • Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a
(Root folder is included.) To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but- track.
ton (2) several times to change the repeat
MP3/WMA MODE play mode to OFF. Displaying CD titles
Press the display button (5).
Selecting a folder • TRACK REPEAT Each time the button is pressed, the title
Turn the sound control knob (1) to select a The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in changes as follows:
folder. the display for 2 seconds and then the
Repeat play The track currently being played is
Press the repeat button (2). played repeatedly. OFF FOLDER TITLE
Each time the button is pressed, repeat • FOLDER REPEAT
play mode changes as follows: The indication “FOLDER RPT” appears
Type 1 in the display for 2 seconds and then the
repeat indicator (D) lights. ALBUM TITLE FILE TITLE
All the tracks in the folder currently being
TRACK REPEAT
played are played repeatedly.
• DISC REPEAT
OFF FOLDER REPEAT
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in ARTIST TITLE TRACK TITLE
66J128 When all the tracks on the disc currently 66J146
Type 2 being played finish playing, play starts Forwarding a title
again at the beginning of the disc. If there is a title with 12 letters or more,
TRACK REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT each press will show next letters in the dis-
Selecting a track play. (No scrolling is made.)
• Press the track up button (3) to listen to Press and hold the display button (5) for 2
the next track. seconds or longer. A title is changed.
OFF DISC REPEAT
• Press the track down button (4) twice to
listen to the previous track.
66J145 When the track down button (4) is
pressed once, the track currently being
played will start again at the beginning.
5-23
78KS0-37E

Shopping Hook:
Front Seat Back Pocket: 3
Underseat Tray: 3
Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer (Option) Display

(E) (F) (G)
(A) (B) (C) (D)

(3) 66J113
(4)
(1) (1) Disc button (CD)
(6)
(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)
(5)
(6) Scan button (SCAN)
(2)
(A) Mode indicator
(B) Disc number
(C) Track number
Type 2 AM/FM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (D) Play time
(E) Repeat indicator
(F) Random indicator
(G) CD changer number
(3)
(4)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(2)
78K099
5-24
78KS0-37E

Luggage Restraint Loops: 5
Luggage Compartment Cover: 5
Selecting a CD changer mode Selecting a disc Random play

Press the disc button (1). Press the disc select button (2) corre- Press the scan button (6).
Each time the button is pressed, the sponding to the disc number you want to Each time the button is pressed, the mode
selected CD plays as follows: listen to. changes in the following order.
Play starts from the first track on the disc. If
a disc number having no disc is pressed,
the selection will be invalid. TRACK RANDOM
Built-in CD player Selecting a track

• Press the track up button (3) to listen to OFF DISC RANDOM
the next track.
CD changer 1 • Press the track down button (4) twice to 66J131
listen to the previous track.
When the track down button (4) is NOTE:
pressed once, the track currently being This operation should be performed within
CD changer 2
played will start again at the beginning. 2 seconds.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track To cancel random play, press the scan but-
52D300 • Hold in the fast forward button (3) to ton (6) several times to change the random
advance a track rapidly. play mode to OFF.
• When only one CD changer is con-
nected to this unit, CD changer 2 is • Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a
track. • TRACK RANDOM
skipped. The tracks in the disc that is loaded are
• When no CD is loaded in the built-in CD played at random.
player, the built-in CD player is skipped. • DISC RANDOM
The tracks in all discs are played at ran-
dom.
NOTE:
The random play can be operated with the
External CD Changer (Option) only.
5-25
78KS0-37E

Luggage Compartment Cover: 5
Underfloor Bins:
Repeat play Remote Audio Controls To control the volume:

Press the repeat button (5). • To increase the volume, push the upper
Each time the button is pressed, repeat (if equipped) part of the switch (1). The volume contin-
play mode changes as follows: ues to increase until you release the
switch.
• To decrease the volume, push the lower
TRACK REPEAT part of the switch (1). The volume contin-
ues to decrease until you release the
switch.
OFF DISC REPEAT • To mute, push the switch (2).
66J144 To select the mode (AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2,

CD, External CD-changer (option)), push
NOTE: the switch (3).
This operation should be performed within
2 seconds. You can also turn on the audio system by
pushing the switch (2).
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-
ton (5) several times to change the repeat To change the radio station:
play mode to OFF. • To advance the next preset station, push
(2) (3) the upper part of the switch (4) briefly.
• TRACK REPEAT • To select the previous preset station,
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in push the lower part of the switch (4)
the display for 2 seconds and then the briefly.
repeat indicator (E) lights. (1) • To scan to a higher frequency radio sta-
The track being currently played is (4) tion, push and hold the upper part of the
played repeatedly. switch (4).
• To scan to a lower frequency radio sta-
• DISC REPEAT tion, push and hold the lower part of the
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in switch (4).
repeat indicator (E) lights. 79K052 To change the selection on a CD:
When all the tracks on a disc being cur- • To advance to the next track on a CD,
rently played finish playing, play starts You can control basic functions of the push the upper part of the switch (4)
again at the beginning of the disc. audio system with the switches on the briefly.
steering wheel. • To select the previous track on a CD,
push the lower part of the switch (4).
5-26
78KS0-37E

Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors: 5, 13
Anti-Theft Feature (1) Power on/off knob

(3) Preset buttons (1 to 6)
The anti-theft feature is intended to dis-
courage theft or the audio system by pre-
venting the system from operating when it
is moved to a different vehicle.
(2) This feature works by allowing you to enter
a Personal Identification Number (PIN).
(1) When the audio system is disconnected
from its power source, such as when the
audio system is removed or the battery is
disconnected, the system will not operate
again unless the PIN is reentered.
(3)
Setting the Anti-Theft Function
1) Turn off the power by pressing the
power on/off knob (1).
Type 2 AM/FM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL
(2)
66J118
(1)
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while
pressing and holding the track up but-
ton (2). The “ENTRY 0000” will blink
and the audio system enter PIN-input
mode.
(3)
78K100
5-27
78KS0-37E

NOTE: Canceling Your Established PIN

Establish your PIN by combining numbers EXAMPLE Setting
from 1 to 6 into any 4-digit number. If you This operation is to be done when you
forget your PIN, when you remove the bat- want to cancel the anti-theft function or
tery for repair etc., you will no longer be change your PIN.
able to operate the audio system.
1) Turn off the power by pressing the
power on/off knob (1).
EXAMPLE 66J117
5) Input the same 4-digit number you pre-

viously entered.
66J117
3) Input the four digit PIN using preset but- 66J121

tons 1 to 6.
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while
pressing and holding the track up but-
66J120
ton (2). The “DELETE 0000” will blink
6) The power of the audio system will turn and the audio system will enter the can-
off. cel mode.
NOTE:
Write down your PIN for the future use.
66J118
4) After you enter your four digit PIN, the

display will return to “0000”.
5-28
78KS0-37E

Confirming Your Personal Identifi- registered PIN, the power of the audio
EXAMPLE cation Number (PIN) system will turn off, and you will be able
When the main power source is discon- to operate the audio system.
nected such as when you exchange your
battery, etc, you will have to confirm your NOTE:
PIN to be able to use the audio system. • If you input your PIN incorrectly, “----” will
be displayed and the anti-theft function
To confirm your PIN: lock mode is entered. If you enter an
incorrect PIN fewer than 6 times, the
locking time will be for 15 seconds; if you
enter an incorrect PIN more than 6
times, the locking time will be for 15 min-
utes.
• If you forget your PIN and enter a wrong
66J124 PIN, you can not perform any further
3) Input your PIN. The power of the audio 66J122 operation.
system will turn off and your PIN will be 1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
deleted. position.
To change your PIN, first delete your
current PIN, then set a new one. EXAMPLE
66J125
2) Input your PIN.

If the PIN that you input matches the
5-29
78KS0-37E

Troubleshooting
Applicable to every device
Phenomenon Cause Remedy
Power is not turned on. Fuse is blown. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
(No sound is produced)
Connections are not properly made. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
Radio
Too much noise. Not tuned correctly to the frequency of a sta- Tune correctly to the station frequency.
tion.
Stations cannot be selected by There is no station with strong radio waves. Select stations by manual tuning.
seek tuning.
CD
Compact disc cannot be loaded. Another compact disc is already loaded. Eject the compact disc before loading a new
one.
Sound skips or is noisy. Compact disc is dirty. Clean the compact disc with a soft cloth.
Compact disc is heavily scratched or warped. Replace with a compact disc with no scratches.
Sound is bad directly after power Water droplets may form on the internal lens Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on.
is turned on. when the car is parked in a humid place.
5-30
78KS0-37E

Error display
This unit has a number of self-diagnostic functions to protect the system.
If a problem should occur, the display shows the type of error. Refer to the table below and take proper measures to correct the problem.
If the problem is corrected, the unit will operate normally.
Error display Measures to be taken

CD/CD changer “Mechanical error”.
This error display indicates a mechanical failure in the CD changer
(failure to change or eject a disc).
The mechanism is probably damaged. Contact your authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
CD/CD changer “Focus error”.
The pick-up-focus is not properly functioning during playback due to
damage on the disc or for other reasons.
Check disc for damage.
CD/CD changer “Disc error”.
The CD is inserted upside down or only an eight-centimeter CD
adapter is equipped.
Check disc for correct loading.
If an error display not listed above appears, turn off the unit and contact your SUZUKI dealer.
5-31
78KS0-37E

Audio Systems (type B) Precautions Cautions on Handling

• When the inside of the car is very cold
and the player is used soon after switch-
ing on the heater, moisture may form on
the disc or the optical parts of the player
and proper playback may not be possi-
ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe it (A)
off with a soft cloth. If moisture forms on
the optical parts of the player, do not use 52D274
the player for about one hour, this will
allow the condensation to disappear nor- This unit has been designed specifically for
mally. playback of compact discs bearing the
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which mark (A).
cause severe vibrations may cause No other discs can be played.
sound to skip.
64J269
• This unit uses a precision mechanism. Removing the disc Proper way to hold
Even in the event that trouble arises, the compact disc
FM/MW/LW CD PLAYER never open the case, disassemble the
WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.
Please bring the unit to an authorized
SUZUKI dealer or a Clarion service
Department.
52D275
To remove the compact disc from its stor-

age case, press down on the center of the
case and lift the disc out, holding it care-
fully by the edges.
Always handle the compact disc by the
edges.
5-32
78KS0-37E

Never touch the surface.
52D348 52D350
52D347
Never stick labels on the surface of the Do not use compact discs that have large
To remove fingermarks and dust, use a compact disc or mark the surface with a scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from pencil or pen. Use of such discs will cause damage or
the center of the compact disc to the cir- prevent the system from operating prop-
cumference. erly.
(B)
(C) (B)
52D349
Do not use any solvents such as commer-

52D351
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,
or thinner to clean compact discs. Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-
light or any heat source.
NOTE:
• Do not use commercially available CD
52D277
protection sheets or discs equipped with
stabilizers, etc.
New discs may have some roughness These may get caught in the internal
around the edges. The unit may not work mechanism and damage the disc.
or the sound may skip if such discs are • CD-R discs may not be able to playback
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to in this unit due to the recording condi-
remove the roughness (C) from edges of tions.
the disc before insertion inside the unit. • CD-RW discs can not playback in this
unit.
5-33
78KS0-37E

Listening to a CD General
CAUTION
• Never insert your finger or hand
into the CD insertion slot. Never
insert foreign objects.
(A) • Never insert a CD with glue coming (2)
out from adhesive tape or a rental (3)
CD label or with a trace indicating
52D274 that adhesive tape or a rental CD (4)
• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A) label has been removed. This may (5)
cannot be used. cause the CD not to eject or result
• Some discs previously recorded in CD- in a malfunction.
R\CD-RW format may not be used.
(1)
64J270
(1) Power on/off knob – volume control

knob
(2) Mute button
(3) Audio control button
52D291 (4) Up button
(5) Down button
• A CD is inserted with its label facing
upward.
• When there is a CD already loaded in
the unit, another CD cannot be loaded at
the same time. Do not use force when
inserting the CD into the CD insertion
slot.
• If a blank disc (non recorded CD-R) is
loaded in the unit, the disc will be
ejected.
5-34
78KS0-37E

Power On/Off Audio Control (4): AVC OFF / AVC1 / AVC2 / AVC3
Press the power on/off knob (1) to switch Bass / Treble / Balance / Fader can be (5): AVC3 / AVC2 / AVC1 / AVC OFF
power on. adjusted.
Press the power on/off knob (1) again to NOTE:
Press the audio control button (3) to select
switch power off. The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function
the desired item. automatically adjusts (increases/
Each time the audio control button (3) is decreases) the sound volume in accor-
Volume Up/Down
pressed the selectable items change as dance with vehicle speed.
Turn the volume control knob (1) clockwise
follows:
to increase the volume.
BAS (Bass) / TRE (Treble) / BAL (Balance)
Turn the volume control knob (1) counter
/FAD (Fader) / AVC (Auto Volume Control)
clockwise to decrease the volume.
(only MP3 version)
Pressing the audio control button (3) again
Mute On/Off
releases Audio Control.
Press the mute button (2) to temporarily
muffle the sound.
Press the up button (4) or the down button
Press the mute button (2) again to restore
(5) to adjust the selected item.
the sound to the preceding level.
• BAS (Bass)
NOTE: (4): To increase bass
• In CD mode, play is temporarily stopped (5): To decrease bass
(pause) instead of muting. • TRE (Treble)
• If power is switched off, or if some button (4): To increase treble
is pressed, mute is automatically (5): To decrease treble
released. • BAL (Balance)
(4): To decrease the left speaker’s vol-
ume
(5): To decrease the right speaker’s vol-
ume
• FAD (Fader)
(4): To decrease the rear speaker’s vol-
ume
(5): To decrease the front speaker’s vol-
ume
• AVC (Auto Volume Control)
(only MP3 version)
5-35
78KS0-37E

Radio Radio Mode NOTE:

If FM/AM button (6) is pressed when power • Stations can be preset for FM1, FM2,
is off or in other than radio mode, the last LW, MW1, and MW2 respectively.
station you were listening to is received. • When stations are preset, the new data
is written over the old data.
Band
(8) Each time FM/AM button (6) is pressed in Auto Preset
radio mode, the bands change as follows: By pressing auto search button (8) for
(4) FM1 / FM2 / LW / MW1 / MW2 / (FM1) about 2 seconds or longer, six stations in
good receiving condition on the band now
(5) Manual Tuning selected can be automatically preset.
(6) The frequencies can be adjusted by press-
ing the up button (4) or the down button NOTE:
(7) (5). • Auto Preset can be released by pressing
(4): Higher frequency the auto search button (8) while auto
64J271
(5): Lower frequency preset is in process.
• Stations can be preset for FM1, FM2,
(4) Up button Auto Tuning LW, MW1, and MW2 respectively.
(5) Down button If the up button (4) or the down button (5) is • Up to six stations can be preset. If sta-
(6) FM/AM button released after pressing it for about 1 sections in good receiving condition are not
(7) Preset button [1] to [6] ond or more, the unit searches for a station found, the number of stations preset may
(8) Auto search button till it receives one. be less than six.
(4): Higher frequency • After you have preset stations, the sta-
(5): Lower frequency tion preset under the button with number
[1] is received. If none of stations is
NOTE: found, the unit is reset to the preceding
If AF is ON, the unit searches for RDS sta- frequency.
tions only. • When stations are preset, the new data
is written over the old data.
Manual Preset • If AF is ON, only RDS stations are pre-
If any of the preset buttons (7) with num- set.
bers [1] to [6] is pressed for about 2 sec-
onds or more, the station received Preset Station Calling
corresponding to the pressed button is pre- By pressing any of the preset buttons (7)
set. with numbers [1] to [6], the corresponding
station preset can be received.
5-36
78KS0-37E

NOTE: RDS (Radio Data System) What is RDS?

If the button for a station not preset is Some FM stations are broadcasting added
pressed, the unit displays “- - -”. data compatible with RDS. This radio set
offers convenient functions using such
data.
RDS service availability varies with areas.
(9) Please understand the following functions
(10) are not available in some areas.
(11)
(4)
• AF (Alternative Frequency)
(5) The unit searches for a station in better
receiving condition that emits the same
programme as now received, and automat-
(1) ically selects that station.
• REG (Region)
64J272 An area in which the AF function may be
(1) Power on/off knob – volume control used to select stations can be set. When
knob REG is ON, the AF function is effective in
(4) Up button the present area only.
(5) Down button • PS (Program Service Name)
(9) Auto frequency button Instead of the frequency, the name of the
(10) Traffic announcement button broadcast station appears.
(11) Program type button
• PTY (Program Type)
Programs can be searched for by PTY.
• TA (Traffic Announcement)
The unit can search for stations emitting
TP (traffic programmes), and tune in to
such stations in preference to others. Sta-
tions emitting TP are called TP stations.
5-37
78KS0-37E

• EON (Enhanced Other Network) • If TP data is not received in about 20 NOTE:

RDS information is updated constantly in seconds after TA is turned on, TP SEEK If the specified PTY is not received, the
response to the current position. automatically takes place only once. unit displays “NOTHING”, and then PTY
The “EON” indicator remains lit while RDS • If no TP station is received, the unit dis- again. If the up button (4) or the down but-
information is received. plays “NOTHING”. ton (5) is pressed, the same PTY is
searched for again.
• Emergency Announcement Recep- TA Standby
tion If TP is received when TA is ON in CD or
Emergency announcements are automati- CD changer mode, radio mode is automat-
cally received and displayed. ically selected. The unit returns to the pre-
ceding mode after TP.
AF/REG On/Off
Each time the auto frequency button (9) is PTY Search
pressed, AF/REG changes as follows: Programs can be searched for by PTY.
AF ON/REG OFF / AF ON/REG ON / AF
OFF/REG OFF / (AF ON/REG OFF) 1) Press the program type button (11) to
select PTY mode.
The “AF” indicator lights up when AF is 2) Turn the volume control knob (1) to
ON. In addition to that, the “REG” indicator select a desired PTY.
lights up when REG is ON. Turning the volume knob (1) clockwise
changes the items in the following
TA On/Off order. (Turning it counter clockwise
Press the traffic announcement button (10) changes them in the reverse order.)
to turn TA on. NO PTY / NEWS / AFFAIRS / INFO /
Press the traffic announcement button (10) SPORTS / EDUCATE / DRAMA / CUL-
again to turn TA off. TURE / SCIENCE / VARIED / POP /
When TA is turned on, the “TA” indicator ROCK / EASY M / LIGHT M / CLAS-
lights. SICS / OTHER M / WEATHER /
The “TP” indicator remains lit while TP FINANCE / CHILDREN / SOCIAL /
data is being received. RELIGION / PHONE IN / TRAVEL /
LEISURE / JAZZ / COUNTRY /
NOTE: NATION M / OLDIES / FOLK M / DOC-
• If the up button (4) or the down button (5) UMENT / (NEWS)
is pressed while TA is turned on, the unit 3) Press the up button (4) or the down but-
searches for a TP station (TP SEEK). ton (5) while PTY is displayed.
Search begins.
5-38
78KS0-37E

CD Player CD Mode NOTE:

CD mode is selected by pressing the CD • When the present track in REPEAT play
button (12) when power is off or in other mode comes to its end, it returns to nor-
(13)
modes. mal play.
• If Fast Forward is kept to the end of the
NOTE: disc, it returns to the first track.
• CD mode is not selected if no CD is in
the unit. SCAN Play
(14) • If the mode has changed to CD changer For scan play (playing about 10 seconds of
(4) (16) mode, press the CD button (12) again. the top of each track), press the scan but-
(15) ton (14).
(5)
CD Insert/Eject To release scan play, press the scan button
To insert a CD, make sure that its label (14) again.
side is up. The “SCN” indicator remains lit during
(12) To eject it, press the eject button (13). scan play.
64J273
NOTE: REPEAT Play
(4) Up button The “CD IN” indicator remains lit while a For repeat play (playing the present track
(5) Down button CD is in the unit. Be careful not to insert a repeatedly), press the repeat button (15).
(12) CD button CD when the “CD IN” indicator is lit. To release repeat play, press the repeat
(13) Eject button button (15) again.
(14) Scan button Track Selection The “RPT” indicator remains lit during
(15) Repeat button The desired track can be selected by repeat play.
(16) Random play button pressing the up button (4) or the down but-
ton (5). RANDOM Play
(4): Next track For random play (playing the disc tracks at
(5): Preceding track (Press it twice) random), press the random play button
(16).
Fast Forward/Fast Reverse To release random play, press the random
Play speed increases while the up button play button (16) again.
(4) or down button (5) is kept depressed. The “RDM” indicator remains lit during ran-
(4): Fast forward dom play.
(5): Fast reverse
5-39
78KS0-37E

CD Changer CD Changer Mode • If Fast Forward is kept to the end of the

If the CD button (12) is pressed when disc, it returns to the first track.
A CD changer is optional. Consult your
power is off or in other modes, CD changer
dealer for details.
mode is selected. SCAN Play
• SCAN Play
NOTE:
For scan play (playing about 10 seconds of
• CD changer mode is not selected if the
the top of each track on the present disc),
CD changer is not connected, or if no
press the scan button (14).
CD is inserted in the unit.
To release scan play, press the scan button
• If the mode has changed to CD mode,
(14) (14) again.
(4) (16) press the CD button (12) again.
The “SCN” indicator remains lit during
(15)
(5) scan play.
Disc Up/Down
The desired disc can be selected by press- • DISC SCAN Play
ing the disc up button (17) or the disc down For disc scan play (playing about 10 sec-
(12) (18) (17) button (18). onds of the top of the first track on each
(17): Next disc disc), press the scan button (14) for about
64J274
(18): Preceding disc 1 second or more.
To release disc scan play, press the scan
(4) Up button Track Up/Down button (14) again.
(5) Down button The desired track can be selected by The “D.SCN” indicator remains lit during
(12) CD button pressing the up button (4) or the down but- disc scan play.
(14) Scan button ton (5).
(15) Repeat button (4): Next track REPEAT Play
(16) Random play button (5): Preceding track (Press it twice)
(17) Disc up button • REPEAT Play
(18) Disc down button Fast Forward/Fast Reverse For repeat play (playing the present track
Play speed increases while the up button repeatedly), press the repeat button (15).
(4) or down button (5) is kept depressed. To release repeat play, press the repeat
(4): Fast forward button (15) again.
(5): Fast reverse The “RPT” indicator remains lit during
repeat play.
NOTE: • DISC REPEAT Play
• When the present track in REPEAT play For disc repeat play (playing the present
mode comes to its end, it returns to nor- disc repeatedly), press the repeat button
mal play. (15) for about 1 second or more.
5-40
78KS0-37E

To release disc repeat play, press the MP3/WMA Player record the contents of about 10 music CDs
repeat button (15) again. on a single CD media (This figures refer to
The “D.RPT” indicator remains lit during (if equipped) data recorded on a 650 MB CD-R or CD-
disc repeat play. RW at a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a
(13) sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz).
RANDOM Play
Points to remember when making MP3/
• RANDOM Play WMA files
For random play (playing the disc tracks at
random), press the random play button Common
(16). • High bit rate and high sampling fre-
To release random play, press the random (4) (16) quency are recommended for high qual-
play button (16) again. (15) ity sounds.
(5)
The “RDM” indicator remains lit during ran- • Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not
dom play. recommended because playing time is
not displayed properly and sound may
• DISC RANDOM Play be skipped.
(12) (18) (17) (20)
For disc random play (playing the tracks of • The playback sound quality differs
all discs at random), press the random play 64J275
depending on the encoding circum-
button (16) for about 1 second or more. (4) File up button stances. For details, refer to the user
To release disc random play, press the ran- (5) File down button manual of your own encoding software
dom play button (16) again. (12) CD button and writing software.
The “D.RDM” indicator remains lit during (13) Eject button
disc random play. (15) Repeat button MP3
(16) Random play button • It is recommended to set the bit rate to
(17) Folder up button “128 kbps or more” and “fixed”.
(18) Folder down button WMA
(20) Text display button • It is recommended to set the bit rate to
“64 kbps or more” and “fixed”.
What is MP3/WMA? • Do not set the copy protect attribute on
MP3 (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer-II/III) and the WMA file to enable this unit to play
WMA (Windows MediaTM Audio) are the back.
compression formats of digital audio. The
former is developed by MPEG (Motion Pic- NOTE:
ture Experts Group), and the latter is Never assign the “.mp3”, or “.wma” file
developed by Microsoft Corporation. Using name extension to a file that is not in the
these compression formats, you can
5-41
78KS0-37E

MP3/WMA format. This may not only pro- Compression formats MP3/WMA Mode
duce noise from the speaker damage, but MP3/WMA mode is selected by pressing
MP3 the CD button (12) when power is off or in
also damage your hearing.
• Bit rate other modes.
MPEG1 Audio Layer II : 64 k – 320 kbps
Recording MP3/WMA files on a CD-
MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 32 k – 320 kbps NOTE:
media
MPEG2 Audio Layer II : 64 k – 320 kbps • MP3/WMA mode is not selected if no
• You are recommended to minimize the
MPEG2 Audio Layer III : 8 k – 160 kbps MP3/WMA disc is in the unit.
chances of making a disc that contains
• Sampling frequency • If the mode has changed to CD changer
both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA files.
MPEG1 Audio Layer II/III : 44.1 k/48 k/32 mode, press the CD button (12) again.
• If CD-DA files are on the same disc as
kHz
MP3 or WMA files, the songs may not
MPEG2 Audio Layer II/III : 22.05 k/24 k/ Disc Insert/Eject
play in the intended order, or some
16 kHz To insert a disc, make sure that its label
songs may not play at all.
• When storing MP3 data and WMA data WMA (Ver.7, Ver.8, Ver. 9*) side is up. To eject it, press the eject button
on the same disc, use different folders • Bit rate (13).
for each data. 32 k – 192 kbps
• Do not record files other than MP3/WMA • Sampling frequency NOTE:
files and unnecessary folder on a disc. 44.1 k/48 k/32 kHz The “CD IN” indicator remains lit while a
• The name of an MP3/WMA file should * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice disc is in the unit. Be careful not to insert a
be added by rules as shown in the fol- are not supported. disc when the “CD IN” indicator is lit.
lowing descriptions and also comply with
the rules of each file system. Supported file systems File Up/Down
• The file extension “.mp3” or “.wma” ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Apple Extension The desired file can be selected by press-
should be assigned to each file depend- to ISO 9660, Joliet, Romeo ing the file up button (4) or the file down
ing on the file format. Maximum number of files/folders button (5).
• You may encounter trouble in playing • Maximum number of files: 511 (files + (4): Next file
MP3/WMA files or displaying the infor- folders) (5): Preceding file (Press it twice.)
mation of MP3/WMA files recorded with • Maximum number of files in one folder:
certain writing software or CD recorders. 255 Folder Up/Down
• This unit does not have a play list func- • Maximum depth of trees: 8 The desired folder can be selected by
tion. • Maximum number of folders: 255 (Root pressing the folder up button (17) or the
• Although Multi-session recording is sup- folder is included.) folder down button (18).
ported, the use of Disc-at-Once is rec- (17): Next folder
ommended. (18): Preceding folder
5-42
78KS0-37E

Fast Forward/Fast Reverse To release random play, press the random Anti-Theft System (SEC)
Play speed increases while the button ((4) play button (16) again.
or (5)) is kept depressed. The “RDM” indicator remains lit during ran-
(4): Fast forward dom play.
(5): Fast reverse
NOTE: (11)
• When the present file in REPEAT play
mode comes to its end, it returns to nor- (4)
mal play.
• If Fast Forward is kept to the end of the
disc, it returns to the first file.
Text Display (1) (19)

Each time the text display button (20) is
pressed in MP3/WMA mode, the display 64J276
change as follows:
Elapsed Time / Folder Name / File Name / (1) Power on/off knob – volume control
(Elapsed Time) knob
(4) Up button
NOTE: (11) Program type button
For scrolling text, hold down the text dis- (19) Numbered buttons [1] to [4]
play button (20) for 2 seconds or more.
You can set up a 4-digit ID to prevent theft.
REPEAT Play Once you set up the ID, the unit is inopera-
For repeat play (playing the present file ble without the ID when this unit or the bat-
repeatedly), press the repeat button (15). tery is removed.
To release repeat play, press the repeat
button (15) again. NOTE:
The “RPT” indicator remains lit during • If the wrong user ID is entered 10 times,
repeat play. the unit displays “HELP” and cannot be
operated.
RANDOM Play • If you should forget your user ID, consult
For random play (playing the disc files at your dealer.
random), press the random play button
(16).
5-43
78KS0-37E

User ID Setting User ID Entry Erasing User ID

1) Press the power on/off knob (1) to turn Once the ID is set up, this unit displays Your stored user ID can be erased. After
off the power. “SEC” to prompt you to enter your user ID erasing it, you may set a new user ID.
2) With the numbered buttons (19) with when the power is turned on again in the Therefore, you can change your user ID as
numbers [3] and [4] kept depressed at case of removal of this unit or the battery. often as you like.
the same time, press the power on/off The unit cannot be used unless the ID is
1) Press the power on/off knob (1) to turn
knob (1) for about 1 second or more. entered in the following order.
off the power.
The unit displays “SEC”.
2) With the numbered buttons (19) with
3) With the up button (4) kept depressed, NOTE:
numbers [3] and [4] kept depressed at
press the numbered button (19) with The unit does not display “SEC” when the
the same time, press the power on/off
number [1]. power is turned on within 20 seconds from
knob (1) for about 1 second or more.
The unit displays “- - - -”. the last use.
The unit displays “SEC”.
4) Press the numbered buttons (19) with
3) With the up button (4) kept depressed,
number [1] to [4], and enter the user ID. 1) With the up button (4) kept depressed,
press the numbered button (19) with
Each button corresponds to each digit, press the numbered button (19) with
number [1].
and the number increases each time number [1].
The unit displays “- - - -”.
the button is pressed. The unit displays “- - - -”.
4) Press the numbered buttons (19) with
For example, to raise the digit second 2) Press the numbered buttons (19) with
number [1] to [4], and enter the user ID.
from the left to 3, press the numbered number [1] to [4], and enter the user ID.
Each button corresponds to each digit.
button (19) with number [2] four times. Each button corresponds to each digit.
Enter the stored user ID.
5) Press the program type button (11) for Enter the stored user ID.
5) Press the program type button (11) for
about 2 seconds or more to enter. 3) Press the program type button (11) for
about 2 seconds or more to enter.
Power is switched off after the unit dis- about 2 seconds or more to enter.
The power is turned off approx, 10 sec-
plays “SEC”. Power is switched off.
onds after “- - - -” is displayed.
Once the ID is set up, the ID is required When you switch the unit back on, it is
at power-on when this unit or the bat- in radio mode for normal use.
tery has been removed.
5-44
78KS0-37E

Troubleshooting
If you suspect something is wrong, then please check and take steps as described below.
If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your nearest dealer.
Common
Problem Possible cause Possible solution
A lot of noise A mobile phone is used nearby. If you are going to use a mobile phone, use it
away from the unit.
Unable to operate The security function is on. If the unit displays “SEC”, enter your user ID.
If the unit displays “HELP”, consult your dealer.
Radio
A lot of noise The unit is not exactly tuned in to the station. Tune it exactly to the station.
Unable to receive by auto tuning There is no station emitting signals powerful Pick up a station by manual tuning.
enough. Turn AF off.
If AF is ON, the unit searches for RDS stations
only.
Unable to preset stations of sig- If AF is ON, only RDS stations will be preset. Turn AF off.
nals powerful enough by auto
preset
CD
Sound skipping or noise The disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.
The disc has a major flaw or is warped. Replace the disc with another without flaws.
CD cannot be inserted A disc is already loaded. Insert a CD after having removed the already
inserted disc by pressing the eject button (13).
5-45
78KS0-37E

Error Display Messages

CD
Display Possible cause Possible solution
The disc cannot be read. Insert the disc with its label side up.
Check the disc that it is not warped and is free of flaws.
ERROR 1
If ERROR 1 does not go out when a normal disc is
inserted, consult your dealer.
The player developed an error of an unidentified If CD is inserted in the unit, press the eject button (13)
ERROR 3 cause. to remove the disc.
If the disc cannot be ejected, consult your dealer.
5-46
78KS0-37E

Remote Audio Controls You can control basic functions of the For vehicle with navigation system
audio system with the switches on the Refer to the chart below how to use the
(if equipped) steering wheel. How to use the switches is switches on the steering wheel.
different if the navigation system is
equipped or not.
For vehicle without navigation system

To control the volume:
• To increase the volume, push the switch
(1).
• To decrease the volume, push the switch
(2).
• To mute, push the switch (3).
To select the mode, push the switch (4).

You can also turn on the audio system by
pushing the switch (3).
To change the radio station/selection on

(3) (4) the CD:
• To scan to a higher frequency radio sta-
tion or advance to the next track on a
(1) (5)
CD, push the switch (5).
• To scan to a lower frequency radio sta-
(2) tion or rewind a track on a CD, push the
(6)
switch (6).
78K079
5-47
78KS0-37E

Turn by turn navigation system

Switch Mode
Switch
operation Navigation Tuner CD player
increase the increase the increase the
Push briefly
volume volume volume
(1)
increase the increase the increase the
Push long
volume rapidly volume rapidly volume rapidly
decrease the decrease the decrease the
Push briefly
volume volume volume
(2)
decrease the decrease the decrease the
Push long
volume rapidly volume rapidly volume rapidly
Push briefly OK (perform) radio preset up switch to track 1
(3) repeat last
Push long scan tuner scan track
(3) (4)
message
Push briefly switch to tuner mode or CD mode
(4)
Push long switch to navigation mode
(1) (5)
scan to a higher
select the upper advance to next
(2) Push briefly frequency preset
(6) navigation menu track
radio station
(5)
select the upper scan to a higher
Push long navigation menu frequency radio fast forward a track
rapidly station
78K073
scan to a lower
select the lower return to previous
Push briefly frequency preset
navigation menu track
radio station
(6)
select the lower scan to a lower
Push long navigation menu frequency radio fast rewind a track
rapidly station
5-48
78KS0-37E

Fuel Filler Cap of the driver’s seat and can be locked by

simply closing the door. EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
Open Close
(2)
79K054
64J085 NOTE:
79K053
The cap holder (1) can hold the fuel filler
To remove the fuel filler cap: cap (2) when refueling.
EXAMPLE 1) Open the fuel filler door.
2) Remove the cap by turning it counter- To reinstall the fuel filler cap:
clockwise. 1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear
several clicks.
WARNING 2) Close the fuel filler door.
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The
fuel may be under pressure and may
WARNING
spray out, causing injury. Gasoline is extremely flammable. Do
not smoke when refueling, and make
simply closing the door. sure there are no open flames or
sparks in the area.
64J253
The fuel filler cap is located on the right

rear side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door
can be unlocked by pulling up on the
opener lever located on the outboard side
5-49
78KS0-37E

Engine Hood
WARNING
If you need to replace the fuel cap, EXAMPLE
use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of an
improper cap can result in a malfunc-
tion of the fuel system or emission
control system. It may also result in
fuel leakage in the event of an acci-
dent.
64J111
64J110 2) Push the under-hood release lever

sideways with your finger, as shown in
To open the engine hood:
the illustration. While pushing the lever,
1) Pull the hood release handle located on
lift up the engine hood.
the outboard side of the driver’s side of
the instrument panel. This will disen-
gage the engine hood lock halfway.
5-50
78KS0-37E

Sun Visor Interior Light Switch

Center
EXAMPLE (3) (2) (1)
64J112
3) Continue to lift up the hood until it is 79J161

high enough to support with the prop 64J104
The sun visors can be pulled down to block
rod.
glare coming through the windshield, or Rear
they can be unhooked and turned to the
To close the engine hood:
side to block glare coming through the side
1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the
window.
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod
back to the holding clip.
2) Lower the hood close to the bumper, CAUTION (3) (2) (1)
then let it drop down. When unhooking and hooking a sun
Make sure the hood is securely latched visor, be sure to handle it by the hard
after closing. plastic parts or the sun visor can be
damaged.
WARNING
Make sure the hood is fully closed
and latched before driving. If it is not,
it can fly up unexpectedly during 64J211
driving, obstructing your view and
resulting in an accident. This light switch has three positions which
function as described below:
5-51
78KS0-37E

ON (1) Luggage Compartment Light

The light comes on and stays on regard- EXAMPLE
less of whether the door is open or closed.
DOOR (2) (1) (2)

The light comes on when the door is
opened.
After closing all doors (including the tail-
gate), the light will remain on for about 15
seconds and then fade out. If you push in
the ignition switch or insert the key during
this time, the light will start to fade out
immediately.
After removing the key from the ignition
switch, the light will turn on for about 15 64J105
seconds and then fade out. NOTE: 66J047
The number of doors involved in the light-
OFF (3) The luggage compartment light is located
ing operation of the interior light depends
The light remains off even when the door is at the left side of the rear luggage com-
on the vehicle specification. If there is a
opened. partment.
switch (rubber projection) at the door
When you open any of the doors including
opening as shown, the door is involved in
the tailgate with the luggage compartment
the lighting operation.
light switch in the “DOOR” position (1), the
light comes on and remains on as long as
you keep the door open.
After closing all doors, the light will remain
on for about 15 seconds and then fade out.
If you push in the ignition switch or insert
the key during this time, the light will start
to fade out immediately.
After removing the key from the ignition
switch, the light will turn on for about 15
seconds and then fade out.
When the luggage compartment light
switch is in the “OFF” position (2), the light
5-52
78KS0-37E

remains off regardless of whether the Spot Light Accessory Socket

door(s) is(are) opened or closed.
(if equipped)
EXAMPLE
(1) EXAMPLE
65J093
Push the switch (1) to turn on the light and 64J121

push it again to turn off the light.
EXAMPLE
64J120
5-53
78KS0-37E

The accessory socket will work when the Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi- CAUTION
tion. (if equipped)
• To avoid damage to the cigarette
12-volt accessory sockets are located both Cigarette Lighter lighter socket, do not use it as
on the center console and on the left side other accessories’ power source.
of the luggage compartment. EXAMPLE Some accessories’ power plug can
Depending on the specification, there are damage the inner mechanism of
two sockets on the center console. the cigarette lighter socket.
• Holding the cigarette lighter in can
Each socket can be used to provide 12 overheat and damage the lighter.
volt/120 watt power for electrical accesso- Release the lighter after you push it
ries when used alone. Make sure that the in.
cap remains on the socket when the socket
is not in use.
CAUTION
• To prevent the fuse from being
blown, when using sockets at the 64J119
same time, do not exceed the total
combined power capacity of 120 The cigarette lighter will work when the
watts. ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
• Use of inappropriate electrical tion.
accessories can cause damage to To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
your vehicle’s electrical system. way into the receptacle and release it. It
Make sure that any electrical will automatically heat up and will pop out
accessories you use are designed to its normal position when it is ready for
to plug into this type of socket. use.
5-54
78KS0-37E

Ashtray Sunroof (if equipped)

You can tilt or slide the sunroof by operat-
EXAMPLE ing the “TILT” part of the sunroof switch or
the “SLIDE” part of the sunroof switch
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
There is a system to prevent being pinched
by the sunroof.
When the system senses that something is
pinched when the sunroof is sliding for-
ward, the sunroof will automatically reverse
direction and slide rearward. This system (1) (2)
will operate when the sunroof is closing
automatically. This system does not oper- 79K097
64J201 ate when tilting the sunroof down. To tilt the sunroof up, slide the sun shade
You can fit the ashtray into any of the cup Make sure there are no hands or other rearward by hand and push the “TILT UP”
holders on the center console. obstructions in the path of the sunroof part (1) of the sunroof switch. To tilt the
when you close the sunroof even though sunroof down, push the “SLIDE OPEN”
WARNING there is a system to prevent being pinched part (2) of the sunroof switch.
by the sunroof. If you push the switch for more than a sec-
Make sure tobacco is fully extin- ond, the sunroof will automatically tilt up or
guished before closing the ashtrays. down fully. To stop the sunroof halfway,
Never throw waste in the ashtrays: it WARNING
push the switch briefly.
could create a fire hazard. • The system to prevent being
pinched by the sunroof does not
work in the area where the sunroof
is almost completely closed.
• The system to prevent being
pinched by the sunroof may not
work if the battery is not suffi-
ciently charged.
5-55
78KS0-37E

How to reactivate the system to prevent

being pinched by the sunroof
When you disconnect the negative (–) ter-
minal from the battery or change the fuses,
the features below will not operate.
• The system to prevent being pinched by
the sliding sunroof.
• The system to automatically open or
close the sunroof fully.
In this case, you must reactivate the fea-
tures using the following procedures.
(1) (2) 1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
79K098 64J109
2) Push and hold the “TILT UP” part (1) of
the sunroof switch, the sunroof will tilt
To slide the sunroof rearward, push the The sun shade will open automatically and up fully and then down slightly. After the
“SLIDE OPEN” part (2) of the sunroof cannot be closed when the sunroof is slid movement stops completely, release
switch. To slide the sunroof forward, push rearward. the switch. The features are reacti-
the “TILT UP” part (1) of the sunroof vated.
switch. 3) Make sure you can open or close the
If you push the switch for more than a sec- sunroof automatically by pushing the
ond, the sunroof will automatically slide sunroof switch for more than about a
fully rearward or forward. To stop the sun- second.
roof halfway, push the switch briefly.
5-56
78KS0-37E

Assist Grips (if equipped)

CAUTION
Do not put your body weight on the
roof around the sunroof such as by
sitting on it.
• Be sure to close the sunroof when you

leave the vehicle unattended.
• Periodically inspect the guide rail for dirt
and clean it if any dirt has accumulated.
65D612
64J136
WARNING Assist grips are provided for convenience.
• Never allow any part of your body
such as hands or head to get out of
the sunroof opening while the vehi-
cle is moving.
• Be sure there are no hands or other
obstructions in the path of the sun-
roof when you close the sunroof.
• Always remove the ignition key
when leaving the vehicle even if for
a short time. Also do not leave chil-
dren alone in a parked vehicle.
Unattended children could use the
sunroof switches and get trapped
by the sunroof.
5-57
78KS0-37E

Coat Hooks (if equipped) Glove Box Eyeglasses Holder

(if equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
UNLOCK
LOCK
64J137 64J065
You can hang clothing on the coat hooks. To open the glove box, pull the latch lever. 79K056
These hooks are not designed for large or To close it, push the lid until it latches
To use the eyeglasses holder, push on the
heavy items. securely. If a lock is equipped on the latch
front edge (1) and open the lid. To close
lever, lock the glove box by inserting the
the lid, push the front edge (1) until it
WARNING key and turning it clockwise and unlock the
latches. Do not put heavy or sharp items in
glove box by turning the key counterclock-
If your vehicle is equipped with side the box.
wise.
curtain air bags, do not hang sharp
items like a hanger on the coat hook. WARNING
When hanging the clothes, hang it on
WARNING
Never drive with the eyeglasses
hook without using a hanger. Never drive with the glove box lid holder open. It could cause injury if
open. It could cause injury if an acci- an accident occurs.
dent occurs.
5-58
78KS0-37E

Cup Holder and Storage Bin

CAUTION
(if equipped)
If you park your vehicle outdoors in Cup holders and a storage bin are pro-
direct sunlight or in hot weather, the vided as shown.
eyeglasses compartment can get
very hot since it is close to the roof.
So, when parking in such conditions: EXAMPLE
• Do not leave eyeglasses in the
compartment. The heat may distort
plastic lenses or frames.
• Do not place flammable items, such
as a lighter, in the compartment.
The heat may cause a fire.
64J115
To use the console bin, pull the lever up

and open the lid.
(rear)
79K025
To access a bin, push the release button.
64J116
To use the rear cup holders, open the lid.
5-59
78KS0-37E

Bottle holder Front Seat Back Pocket

EXAMPLE (if equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
64J254
64J200
You should hold a bottle with a cap in the

WARNING bottle holder. 64J127
Do not use the cup holder or the stor- This pocket is provided for holding light
age bin to hold cups containing hot and soft things such as gloves, newspa-
liquids, or sharp edged, hard or pers or magazines.
breakable objects. Objects in the cup
holder may be thrown about during a WARNING
sudden stop or impact, and could
cause personal injury. Do not put hard or breakable objects
in the pocket. If an accident occurs,
objects such as bottles, cans, etc.
can injure the occupants in the rear
seat.
5-60
78KS0-37E

Shopping Hook (if equipped) Armrest (if equipped) To use the armrest, pull the knob to unlock
and lower the armrest. When not in use,
Center console armrest push back in the seat until the armrest is
EXAMPLE locked.
WARNING
In an accident or sudden stop, the
rear armrest (if equipped) could fall
forward. If there is a child in a rear-
facing child restraint in the center
seating position, the falling armrest
could injure the child. Make sure the
armrest is secured in the stowed
position with the strap when not in
use.
64J176
The shopping hooks are located on both 64J263

sides of the luggage compartment. CAUTION
You can hang the shopping bag or other Rear armrest (if equipped)
To avoid damage to the armrest, do
suitable objects on the hook. This hook is not lean on it or allow a child to sit on
not designed for large or heavy items. EXAMPLE it.
64J103
5-61
78KS0-37E

Luggage Compartment Cover To remove the luggage compartment

cover: rear
Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-
gage compartment can be hidden from
view by a luggage compartment cover. front
However, the luggage compartment covers
are not designed to support items loaded
on top of them, and may get damaged if
used as a shelf.
WARNING
Do not carry items on top of the lug-
gage compartment cover, even if they
are small and light. Objects on top of
the cover could be thrown about in (a) (a)
an accident, causing injury, or could
obstruct the driver’s rear view. 66J203
1) Release the three hooks (a) from the

rear seat backs.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the luggage com-
partment cover:
• Do not place items on top of it.
• Do not push down on it or lean on
it.
• Handle it carefully when installing
or removing.
66J204
NOTE: 2) Fold and roll the cover forward.
The seatback should always be securely
latched in a fairly upright position when
removing or installing the luggage com-
partment cover.
5-62
78KS0-37E

clearance is established on the other To stow a luggage compartment cover

end to swing the cover down and out. on the floor of the rear luggage room:
(b)
66J205
3) Lift up both ends of the cover to disen-

66J206
gage the attachment points (b).
5) Tilt the luggage compartment cover,
and then remove the compartment
cover from the vehicle.
CAUTION
When you place the end of the cover
in the quarter window opening (c), be
careful not to damage the window or
(c) other materials while positioning the
compartment cover.
66J207
Tilt the cover, and fit it onto floor of the rear

66J228
luggage room.
4) Place one end of the cover in the quar-
ter window opening (c) so enough
5-63
78KS0-37E

To reinstall the luggage compartment

cover:
(c)
(d)
(e)
(b)
66J209 66J210
2) Align the attachment points (d) on the 3) Unroll/unfold the cover as you secure
66J208
cover with the attachment points (b) on the other latches (e).
1) Fold/roll the luggage compartment the vehicle and push down both ends.
cover, and place one end in the quarter Make sure that the cover securely fits in
window opening (c) to swing the other the attachment points.
end into position.
(a) (a)
66J229
4) Reattach the three hooks (a) to the rear

seat backs.
5-64
78KS0-37E

Underfloor Bins (if equipped) Luggage Restraint Loops

WARNING
(if equipped)
EXAMPLE The luggage restraint loops and
optional rubber net can be used to
help keep lightweight cargo from
moving around in the luggage com-
partment during normal driving. They
are neither capable of nor intended
for preventing cargo from being
(A) thrown around in a crash.
Place heavier objects on the floor
and as far forward in the cargo area
as possible. Never pile cargo higher
than the top of the seat backs.
64J132
Pull up the straps (A) to open the bin. WARNING

64J129
Four luggage restraint loops are provided Do not attach the child restraint top
on the luggage compartment floor. An strap to the luggage restraint loops.
optional rubber net can be hooked to these Incorrectly attached top strap will
loops to help keep cargo from moving reduce the intended effectiveness of
around in the luggage compartment during the child restraint system.
normal driving.
5-65
78KS0-37E

Roof Rails or Roof Rack You can use the roof rails or the roof rack • Mount and secure the cargo onto the
anchors to attach the optional roof rack roof rack properly according to the
Anchors (if equipped) which is available at your SUZUKI dealer. If instructions provided. Be sure to stow
you use a roof rack, observe the instruc- the heaviest items at the bottom and dis-
Roof rails
tions and precautions in this section and tribute the cargo as evenly as possible.
provided with the roof rack. • Do not carry items so large that they
hang over the bumpers or the sides of
(For vehicles with roof rack anchors) the vehicle, or block your view.
To remove the cap, slide the cap in the • Secure the front and rear ends of long
direction of the arrow (1) and then lift the items – such as wood panels, surfboards
edge of the cap up as shown in the illustra- and so forth – to both the front and rear
tion. To install the cap, put in the front part of the vehicle. You should protect the
of the cap, slide the cap in the opposite painted surfaces of the vehicle from
direction of the arrow (1) and then push scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.
down the rear part of the cap. • Check periodically to make sure the roof
• Make sure the roof rack is securely rack is securely installed and free from
installed. damage.
• To mount various types of cargo (such • For vehicles with roof rack anchors,
64J133 as skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit- make sure the anchors are covered with
Roof rack anchors able attachments which are available the caps when not in use.
from your SUZUKI dealer. Be sure to
install the attachments properly and
securely according to the instructions
provided. Do not mount cargo directly on
the roof panel. The cargo can damage
the roof panel.
(1) • The gross weight of the roof rack plus
cargo must not exceed the loading
capacity (75 kg (165 lbs)). Also, do not
let the gross vehicle weight (fully loaded
vehicle including driver, passengers,
cargo, roof load and trailer tongue
weight) exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) listed in the
64J224
“SPECIFICATIONS” section of this man-
ual.
5-66
78KS0-37E

Frame Hooks Hooks are provided on both the front and

WARNING rear of the vehicle for use in emergency sit-
Front uations.
• Abrupt maneuvers or failure to
properly secure cargo can allow To access the front hook, unhook the lower
the cargo to fly off the vehicle and (1)
part of the cover (1) and then remove the
hit others, causing personal injury cover (1).
or property damage.
• Mount cargo securely and avoid To tow your vehicle on the road or highway,
abrupt maneuvers such as “jack- follow the instruction of “Towing” in “EMER-
rabbit” starts, sharp turns, fast cor- GENCY SERVICE” section.
nering and sudden braking. Check
periodically to make sure that
cargo is securely fastened.
WARNING
• Large, bulky, long, or flat items can Do not use these hooks to tow (or be
affect vehicle aerodynamics or be towed by) another vehicle on the
caught by the wind, and can reduce road or highway except in emergency
vehicle control resulting in an acci- 78K052 situation.
dent and personal injury. Drive Rear
cautiously at reduced speed when
carrying this type of cargo.
64J123
5-67
78KS0-37E

(2) (2)
78K053
The frame hooks (2) are provided for ship-

ping purposes only.
5-68
78KS0-37E

MEMO
5-69
78KS0-37E

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1
Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-1
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) ...................... 6-6
54G215
78KS0-37E

Vehicle Loading: 11
Trailer Towing: 5, 11
Vehicle Loading Trailer Towing

Your vehicle was designed for specific WARNING
weight capacities. The weight capacities of Never overload your vehicle. The
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross gross vehicle weight (sum of the
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the weights of the vehicle, all the occu-
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR, front pants, accessories, cargo plus trailer
and rear). The GVWR and GAWR (front nose weight if towing a trailer) must
and rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICA- never exceed the Gross Vehicle
TIONS” section. Weight Rating (GVWR). In addition,
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall never distribute a load so that the
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including weight on either the front or rear axle
all the occupants, accessories and cargo exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rat-
plus the trailer nose weight if towing a ing (GAWR).
trailer).
GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per- WARNING 60A185
missible weight on an individual axle.
Always distribute cargo evenly. To Although towing a trailer can adversely
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and avoid personal injury or damage to affect handling, durability, and fuel econ-
actual loads at the front and rear axles can your vehicle, always secure cargo to omy, your SUZUKI can be used to tow a
only be determined by weighing the vehi- prevent it from shifting if the vehicle trailer which does not exceed the towing
cle. Compare these weights to the GVWR moves suddenly. Place heavier capacity specified below:
and GAWR (front and rear). If the gross objects on the floor and as far for-
vehicle weight or the load on either axle ward in the cargo area as possible. Towing capacity
exceeds these ratings, you must remove Never pile cargo higher than the top If there is not any local regulation about the
enough weight to bring the load down to of the seat backs. towing capacity (for example, registered or
the rated capacity. statutory towing capacity), the recom-
mended general towing capacities are;
6-1
78KS0-37E

Recommended general towing capac- Tow Bars

ity (trailer, cargo & tow bar) CAUTION Only use a tow bar that is designed to
Braked trailer: attach to the chassis of your vehicle, and a
• 5 door J20A engine For Automatic Transmission vehi- hitch that is designed to bolt to this bracket.
M/T: 1850 kg (4078 lbs) cles, do not use “D” range when tow-
A/T: 1700 kg (3748lbs) ing on a steep hill. Towing in “D”
range when driving on a steep hill WARNING
• 5 door N32A engine/F9Q diesel engine
2000 kg (4409 lbs) can cause automatic transmission Never use a tow bar which attaches
fluid overheating without warning, to the axle or the bumper of your
Unbraked trailer: which can result in transmission vehicle.
• 5 door damage.
750 kg (1653 lbs) Safety Chains
Always attach safety chains between your
If there is a regulation which specifies max- vehicle and trailer. Cross safety chains
imum trailer weights greater than the under the nose of the trailer so that the
capacities shown above; vehicles sold in nose will not drop to the road if the trailer
these countries have towing capacities becomes separated from the tow bar. Fol-
which match the maximum trailer weight low the manufacturer’s recommendation
permitted. for attaching safety chains. Always leave
Before towing, find out if your country has just enough slack to permit full turning.
a specific regulation regarding maximum Never allow safety chains to drag on the
trailer weight (registered or statutory tow- road.
ing capacity, whichever is smaller), and do
not exceed the maximum weight require- WARNING
ment for your vehicle, if one exists. If your Never attach safety chains to the
country does not have a regulation regard- bumper of your vehicle. Secure con-
ing maximum trailer weight, do not exceed nections so that they can’t come
the towing capacities shown above. loose.
CAUTION
Trailer Lights
Trailer towing puts additional stress Make sure your trailer is equipped with
on the engine, drive train, and brakes lights which meet local requirements.
of your vehicle. Never tow a trailer Always check for the proper operation of all
during the first 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer lights before you start to tow.
vehicle operation.
6-2
78KS0-37E

Mirrors
WARNING Check to see if your vehicle’s mirrors meet WARNING
local requirements for mirrors used on tow-
Never connect trailer lights directly ing vehicles. If they do not, you must install Improper weight distribution of your
into your vehicle’s electrical system, the required mirrors before you tow. trailer may result in poor vehicle han-
or electrical system damage may dling and swaying of the trailer.
occur. Always make sure that trailer nose
Vehicle/Trailer Loading weight is about 10% of gross trailer
To load your vehicle and trailer properly, weight, but does not exceed “Maxi-
Brakes you must know how to measure gross mum vertical load on trailer hitch
trailer weight and trailer nose weight. point”. Also make sure that the cargo
WARNING
Gross Trailer Weight is the weight of the is properly secured. Failure to
If trailer brakes are used, you should trailer plus all the cargo in it. You can mea- observe this requirement may result
follow all instructions provided by sure gross trailer weight by putting the fully in an accident.
the manufacturer. Never connect to loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
the brake system of your vehicle and
never take an electrical supply Nose Weight is the downward force WARNING
directly from the wiring harness. exerted on the tow bar by the trailer cou-
pler, with the trailer fully loaded and the Never overload your trailer or your
coupler at its normal towing height. This vehicle. Gross trailer weight must
Tires never exceed the “Towing capacity”.
weight can be measured using a bathroom
scales. Gross vehicle weight (sum of the
WARNING weights of the vehicle, all the occu-
The weight of your loaded trailer (Gross pants, accessories including tow
When towing a trailer, it is very
Trailer Weight) should never exceed the bars and a trailer hitch, cargo and
important for your vehicle and trailer
“Towing capacity”. trailer nose weight) must never
to have properly inflated tires. Your
vehicle’s tires should be inflated to Distribute cargo in your trailer so that nose exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
the pressures listed on your vehicles weight is about 10% of gross trailer weight, ing (GVWR) listed in the “SPECIFICA-
Tire Information label. If laden pres- but does not exceed “Maximum vertical TIONS” section.
sures are listed on the label, the tires load on trailer hitch point”. You should
should be inflated to the laden pres- measure gross trailer weight and nose
sures. Inflate trailer tires according to weight before towing to make sure that
the specifications provided by the your load is properly distributed.
trailer manufacturer.
6-3
78KS0-37E

Additional Trailer Towing Warnings

WARNING WARNING
WARNING (Continued) (Continued)
Connect trailer lights and hook up • When roads are wet, slippery or • Avoid sudden acceleration and
safety chains every time you tow. rough, drive at a slower speed than stopping of the vehicle. Do not
you would on dry, smooth roads. make quick maneuvers unless they
Failure to slow down when road are necessary.
CAUTION conditions are bad can result in • Slow down in cross winds and be
Because towing a trailer puts addi- loss of control. prepared for gusts of wind from
tional stress on your vehicle, more • Always have someone guide you large passing vehicles.
frequent maintenance will be when reversing. • Be careful when overtaking other
required than under normal driving • Allow adequate stopping distance. vehicles. Be sure to allow enough
conditions. Follow the schedule for Stopping distance is increased room for your trailer before you
“Maintenance Recommended under when you tow a trailer. For each 16 change lanes, and signal well in
Severe Driving Conditions”. km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at advance.
least one vehicle and trailer length • Slow down and shift into a lower
between you and the vehicle ahead. gear before you reach long or steep
WARNING Follow at a greater distance if roads downhill grades. It is hazardous to
are wet or slippery. attempt downshifting while you are
Your vehicle will handle differently • If the trailer has over-run brakes, descending a hill.
when towing a trailer. For your safety apply the brakes gradually to avoid • Avoid “riding” the brakes. This
and the safety of others, you should snatching caused by the trailer could cause the brakes to over-
observe the following precautions: wheels locking. heat resulting in reduced braking
• Practice turning, stopping, and • Slow down before corners and efficiency. Use engine braking as
reversing before you begin towing maintain a steady speed while cor- much as possible.
in traffic. Do not tow in traffic until nering. Deceleration or accelera- • Because of the added trailer
you are confident that you can han- tion while cornering can result in weight, your engine may overheat
dle the vehicle and trailer safely. loss of control. Remember that a on hot days when going up long or
• Never exceed towing speed limits larger than normal turning radius is steep hills. Pay attention to your
or 80 km/h (50 mph), whichever is needed because the trailer wheels engine temperature gauge. If it indi-
lower. will be closer than vehicle wheels cates overheating, pull off the road
• Never drive at a speed that causes to the inside of the turn. and stop in a safe place. Refer to “If
shaking or swaying of the trailer. If (Continued) the Engine Overheats” in “Emer-
you notice even the slightest sign gency Remedies” section.
of shaking or swaying, slow down.
(Continued)
6-4
78KS0-37E

Trailer hitch installation points

WARNING
(Continued)
6) If your vehicle is equipped with
the transfer switch, make sure the
transfer switch is not in “N” (Neu-
tral).
(side) (side) (side) (side)
When starting out after parking:
1) Depress the clutch (if equipped)
and start the engine.
2) Shift into gear, release the parking
brake, and slowly pull away from
the chocks.
60A186
3) Stop, apply the brakes firmly and
hold them. 78K075
4) Have another person remove the
WARNING chocks. Registered maximum vertical load on
trailer hitch point (EU):
When parking your vehicle and con- 85 kg (187 lbs)
nected trailer, always use the follow-
ing procedure: Maximum permissible overhang:
1) Apply the vehicle’s brakes firmly. 1100 mm (43.3 in.)
2) Have another person place wheel
chocks under the wheels of the
vehicle and the trailer while you
are holding the brakes.
3) Slowly release the brakes until the
wheel chocks absorb the load.
4) Fully engage the parking brake.
5) Manual Transmission – Shift into
Reverse or first gear and turn off
the engine.
Automatic Transmission – Shift
into Park and turn off the engine.
(Continued)
6-5
78KS0-37E

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13
Towing Your Vehicle TOWING INSTRUCTION TABLE 4WD Vehicle With a Transfer Switch
(recreational towing) TRANS- TOWING
Your vehicle may be towed behind another DRIVE TRAIN
MISSION METHOD
vehicle (such as a motorhome), provided
you use the proper towing method speci- 4WD A/T A
fied for your vehicle. The towing method with a
transfer switch M/T A
you must use depends on the specifica-
tions of your vehicle: whether it is a 2- 4WD A/T none
wheel drive (2WD), 4-wheel drive (4WD) without a
with a transfer switch or 4-wheel drive transfer switch M/T none
(4WD) without a transfer switch vehicle.
A/T B
Use the towing instruction table to select 2WD
the proper towing method for your vehicle, M/T B
and carefully follow the corresponding
54G585
instructions. Be sure to use proper towing
equipment designed for recreational tow- CAUTION
ing and make sure that towing speed does Never tow your 4WD vehicle without
not exceed 90 km/h (55 mph). a transfer switch using recreational
towing methods. If you do, the trans-
mission will be permanently dam-
aged.
64J234
6-6
78KS0-37E

Before towing To tow a vehicle equipped with a trans-

WARNING fer switch with all four wheels on the
ground:
When you tow your vehicle, follow 1) Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-
the instructions below to avoid acci- tion.
dents and damage to your vehicle. In 2) Place the transmission in “N” (Neutral)
addition, be sure to observe govern- and depress the brake pedal and the
ment and local requirements regard- clutch pedal fully (if equipped).
ing vehicle lighting and trailer hitches 3) Use the transfer switch to shift into neu-
or tow bars. tral.
WARNING (1)
A safety chain should always be used

when you tow your vehicle.
64J147
Vehicles equipped with a transfer switch

CAUTION may be towed from the front with all four 64J218
Do not tow your vehicle with either wheels on the ground. Be sure to use
proper towing equipment designed for rec- NOTE:
front wheels or rear wheels directly
reational towing and make sure that towing First, push in and turn the switch to the
on the ground (and the transmission
speed does not exceed 90 km/h (55 mph). mark (1) at the left of the “N” position, and
in neutral). If you do, the transmis-
hold the switch in this position for 5 sec-
sion will be damaged fatally.
onds until the “N” indicator blinks, then turn
the switch to the “N” position.
When you turn the transfer switch to the
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with
the buzzer sound.
6-7
78KS0-37E

4) Make sure the “N” light on the instru-

ment cluster comes on. TOWING METHOD A
5) Shift the manual transmission lever into
2nd gear or the automatic transmission FOUR WHEELS ON THE GROUND
lever into “P” (Park).
6) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-
tion to unlock the steering wheel.
7) Release the parking brake.
Stop towing the vehicle every 300 km (200

miles). Start the engine. With the manual
transmission lever in 2nd gear (or the auto-
matic transmission lever in “D”) and the
transfer switch in neutral, rev the engine for
about one minute with the clutch engaged
(if equipped), to circulate oil in the transfer
case.
64J148
6-8
78KS0-37E

4WD Vehicle Without a Transfer 2WD Vehicle

Switch 1) Secure the rear wheels on a towing
dolly according to the instructions pro-
vided by the dolly manufacturer.
2) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-
tion to unlock the steering wheel.
3) Make sure the front wheels are facing
straight forward and secure the steering
wheel with a steering wheel clamping
device designed for towing.
CAUTION
The steering column is not strong
64J234
enough to withstand shocks trans-
mitted from the front wheels during
You can not tow your vehicle behind towing. Always unlock the steering
54G586 another vehicle using recreational towing wheel before towing.
methods.
CAUTION
Never tow your vehicle using recre-
ational towing methods. If you do, the
transmission will be permanently
damaged.
54G585
6-9
78KS0-37E

TOWING METHOD B
FRONT WHEELS ON THE GROUND
AND REAR WHEELS ON A DOLLY.
52D082
6-10
78KS0-37E

MEMO
6-11
78KS0-37E

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-2
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving
Conditions ........................................................................... 7-5
Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-7
Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-8
Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-12
Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-15
Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 7-16
Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-18
Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-21
Automatic Transmission (AT) Fluid .................................. 7-21 7
Fuel Filter (Diesel engine) .................................................. 7-22
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-23
Steering ................................................................................ 7-25
60G410
Power Steering (if equipped) ............................................. 7-25
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-25
Battery .................................................................................. 7-28
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-29
Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 7-34
Head Light Washer Fluid .................................................... 7-34
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-34
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-41
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-45
Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-45
78KS0-37E

WARNING WARNING
(Continued) (Continued)
• To prevent damage or unintended • Do not touch ignition wires or other
activation of the air bag system or ignition system parts when starting
seat belt pretensioner system, be the engine or when the engine is
sure the battery is disconnected running, or you could receive an
and the ignition switch has been in electric shock.
the “LOCK” position for at least 90 • Be careful not to touch a hot
seconds before performing any engine, exhaust manifold and
electrical service work on your pipes, muffler, radiator and water
SUZUKI. Do not touch air bag sys- hoses.
tem components, seat belt preten- • Do not allow smoking, sparks, or
60A187S
sioner system components or flames around gasoline or the bat-
wires. tery. Flammable fumes are present.
The wires are wrapped with yellow • Do not get under your vehicle if it is
WARNING tape or yellow tubing, and the cou- supported only with the portable
You should take extreme care when plers are yellow for easy identifica- jack provided in your vehicle.
working on your vehicle to prevent tion. • Be careful not to cause accidental
accidental injury. Here are a few pre- • Do not leave the engine running in short circuits between the positive
cautions that you should be espe- garages or other confined areas. and negative battery terminals.
cially careful to observe: • When the engine is running, keep • Keep used oil, coolant, and other
(Continued) hands, clothing, tools, and other fluids away from children and pets.
objects away from the fan and drive Dispose of used fluids properly;
belt. Even though the fan may not never pour them on the ground,
be moving, it can automatically into sewers, etc.
turn on without warning.
• When it is necessary to do service
work with the engine running, make
sure that the parking brake is set
fully and the transmission is in
Neutral (for manual transmission
vehicles) or Park (for automatic
transmission vehicles).
(Continued)
7-1
78KS0-37E

Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
Maintenance Schedule Periodic Maintenance NOTE:

This table includes services as scheduled
The following table shows the times when Schedule up to 90000 km (54000 miles) mileage.
you should perform regular maintenance
“R” : Replace or Change Beyond 90000 km (54000 miles), carry out
on your vehicle. This table shows in miles,
“I” : Inspect and correct or replace the same services at the same intervals
kilometers and months when you should
if necessary respectively.
perform inspections, adjustments, lubrica-
“L” : Lubricate
tion and other services. These intervals
should be shortened if driving is usually
NOTE:
done under severe conditions (refer to
• Class 1:
“Maintenance Recommended under
Gasoline engine with air fuel ratio
Severe Driving Conditions”).
sensor and/or oxygen sensor
• Class 2:
WARNING Gasoline engine neither air fuel ratio
SUZUKI recommends that mainte- sensor nor oxygen sensor
nance on items marked with an aster- • Class 3:
isk (*) be performed by your F9Q diesel engine
authorized SUZUKI dealer or a quali-
fied service technician. If you are EXAMPLE
qualified, you may perform mainte-
nance on the unmarked items by
referring to the instructions in this
section. If you are not sure whether
you can successfully complete any of
the unmarked maintenance jobs, ask
your authorized SUZUKI dealer to do
the maintenance for you. (1)
CAUTION (2)
Whenever it becomes necessary to
64J150
replace parts on your vehicle, it is
recommended that you use genuine (1) Air fuel ratio sensor
SUZUKI replacement parts or their (2) Oxygen sensor
equivalent.
7-2
78KS0-37E

*Interval: This interval should be judged by odom- km (x1000) 15 30 45 60 75 90

eter reading or months, whichever comes first. miles (x1000) 9 18 27 36 45 54
months 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE
1-1. Engine accessory drive belt [Class1,2] 1.6 L engine: Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement – – I – – R
[Class1,2] Except 1.6 L engine: Inspect for damage – – I – – I
[Class 3] Including tensioner, idlers – – – – R –
*1-2. Camshaft timing belt [Class 3] In cluding tensioner – – – – R –
*1-3. Valve lash (clearance) [Class 1, 2] Except 3.2 L engine – I – I – I
1-4. Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R
1-5. Engine coolant [Class 1, 2] SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – R – – R
SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#1) First time only: Replace at 150000km (90000miles) or 90months
Second time and after: Replace every 75000km (45000miles) or 45months
[Class 3] – R – R – R
*1-6. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – I – I – I
IGNITION (except Diesel engine)
2-1. Spark plugs When unleaded fuel is used
[Class 1] (Highly recommended) Iridium plug (or Platinum plug for 3.2 L engine) Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles) or 84 months.
[Class 1] (Standard type) Nickel plug – – R – – R
[Class 2] (If available) Iridium plug – – – R – –
[Class 2] (Standard type) Nickel plug – R – R – R
When leaded fuel is used, refer to “Severe Driving Condition” schedule
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road I I R I I R
Dusty condition Refer to “Severe Driving condition” schedule.
*3-2. Fuel lines – I – I – I
*3-3. Fuel filter [Class 1, 2] Replace every 105000 km or 63000 miles.
[Class 3] – – – R – –
*3-4. Fuel tank – – I – – I
#1: Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue), follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green).
• For Sweden: Item 2-1, 4-1 and 4-2 should be per- Their next maintenance service should be done (1) V belt
formed by odometer reading only. within the specified period.
• For Item 2-1. Nickel spark plugs, replace every (2) V-rib belt
50000 km if the local law requires. • For Item 1-4 The engine oil level should be checked
• Some maintenance items are required to be ser- regularly.
viced at times other than the regular maintenance • For further details, see “Daily Inspection Checklist”
times shown at the top of above table. These items in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
can be serviced at an earlier service opportunity
according to customer’s maintenance convenience. 65D395
7-3
78KS0-37E

*Interval: This interval should be judged by odom- km (x1000) 15 30 45 60 75 90

eter reading or months, whichever comes first. miles (x1000) 9 18 27 36 45 54
months 12 24 36 48 60 72
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. Crankcase ventilation system [Class 1] – – – – – I
[Class 2] – – I – – I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system [Class 1] – – – – – I
[Class 2] – I – I – I
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) I I I I I I
Brake drums and shoes (if equipped) – I – I – I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – I – I – I
5-3. Brake fluid Check, *Replacement – R – R – R
5-4. Brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) I – – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
6-1. Clutch – I – I – I
6-2. Tires I I I I I I
*6-3. Wheels I I I I I I
*6-4. Drive shafts/Propeller shafts – – I – – I
*6-5. Suspension system – I – I – I
*6-6. Steering system – I – I – I
*6-7. Manual transmission oil (I: 1st 15000 km only) I – R – – R
*6-8. Transfer oil I – I – I –
*6-9. Differential oil (R: 1st 15000 km only) R or I – I – I –
6-10. Automatic transmission Fluid level – I – I – I
* Fluid change Replace every 165000 km (99000 miles).
* Fluid hose – – – I – –
6-11. All latches, hinges and locks – I – I – I
*6-12. Power steering (if equipped) I I I I I I
*6-13. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – I R – I R
WARNING
The shock absorbers are filled with high pressure gas. Never attempt to disassemble it or throw it into a fire. Avoid storing it
near a heater or heating device. When scrapping the absorber, the gas must be released from the absorber safely.
Ask your dealer for assistance.
7-4
78KS0-37E

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Condi-
tions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions

If the car is usually used under the conditions corresponding to any severe condition code given below, it is recommended that applicable
maintenance operation be performed at the particular interval as given in the chart below.
Severe condition code

A – Repeated short trips
B – Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
C – Driving on dusty roads
D – Driving in extremely cold weather and/or salted roads
E – Repeated short trips in extremely cold weather
F – Leaded fuel use
G – Low quality fuel use
H – Trailer towing (if admitted)
Severe Maintenance
Maintenance Maintenance Interval
Condition Code Operation
Every 15000 km (9000 miles)
I
or 12 months
– B C D – – – – Engine accessory drive belt (Gasoline engine)
R
or 36 months
Engine accessory drive belt (Diesel engine) Every 30000 km (18000 miles)
– B C D – – – – R
Including tensioner, idlers or 24 months
Camshaft timing belt (Diesel engine only) Every 45000 km (27000 miles)
A – C D E – – – R
Including tensioner or 36 months
Engine oil and oil filter (Gasoline engine) Every 7500 km (4500 miles)
A – C D E F – H R
(Diesel engine) or 6 months
– – – – – – G – Engine oil and oil filter (Diesel engine) R
or 6 months
– B – – – – – – Exhaust pipe mountings I
or 12 months
Iridium or Platinum plug Every 30000 km (18000 miles)
R
(highly recommended) or 24 months
A B C – E F – H Spark plugs
Nickel plug Every 10000 km (6000 miles)
R
(standard type) or 8 months
7-5
78KS0-37E

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Condi-
tions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
Severe Maintenance
Maintenance Maintenance Interval
Condition Code Operation
I Every 2500 km (1500 miles)
Air cleaner filter element
– – C – – – – – Every 30000 km (18000 miles)
(Inspect or replace more frequently if necessary.) R
or 24 months
Fuel filter (Diesel engine) Every 5000 km (3000 miles)
– – – – – – G – R
(Change each time water is detected.)
– B – – E – – H Automatic transmission fluid change R
or 24 months
– B – – – – – – Suspension bolts and nuts T
or 12 months
– B C D – – – H Wheel bearings I
or 12 months
– B – D E – – H Drive shafts and Propeller shafts I
or 12 months
First time only:
15000 km (9000 miles)
or 12 months
Manual transmission oil/Transfer oil
– B – – E – – H R Second time and after:
Differential oil
or 24 months reckoning from 0 km
(0 mile) or 0 month
Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) I
or 12 months
– – C D – – – – (Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air
conditioner decreases.) Every 45000 km (27000 miles)
R
or 36 months
NOTE:
I – Inspect and correct or replace if necessary
R – Replace or change
T – Tighten to the specified torque
7-6
78KS0-37E

Drive Belt: 1, 2
Drive Belt
L4 2.0 L V6 3.2 L
WARNING
When the engine is running, keep
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away
from the moving fan and drive belts.
(For Gasoline Engine Model)

Check the accessory drive belt only for PS
ADB
damage. You do not need check it for ten-
sion as it has an automatic tensioner. GE
GE AC
If you need to replace or adjust the belt
have it done by your SUZUKI dealer.
(For Diesel Engine Model)
The drive belt tension is adjusted automat-
ically.
ADB: Accessory drive belt

GE: Generator
PS: Power steering pump
AC: Air conditioner compressor
78K091
7-7
78KS0-37E

Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2
Engine Oil and Filter (For Diesel Engine Model) Oil Level Check
Engine oil dipstick
Specified Oil
2.0 L or 3.2 L engine (2) 5W-40 EXAMPLE
5W-30
0W-30
o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
15W-40 o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
10W-40
(1)
10W-30
5W-30
o 78K101
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104 (2) Preferred
Be sure that the engine oil you use comes 80G064

under the following quality classification. (For Diesel Engine Model)
78K089
• ACEA C3: with DPF® EXAMPLE
(1) Preferred • ACEA B4 or C3: without DPF®
Be sure that the engine oil you use comes Select the appropriate oil viscosity accord-
under the quality classification of SG, SH, ing to the above chart.
SJ, SL or SM. Select the appropriate oil SAE 5W-30 (2) is the best choice for good
viscosity according to the above chart. fuel economy, and good starting in cold
SAE 5W-30 (1) is the best choice for good weather.
fuel economy, and good starting in cold
weather. CAUTION
Use only the recommended ACEA B4
or C3. Use of non-recommended
engine oil will cause a damage of the 64J227
diesel engine or DPF®.
7-8
78KS0-37E

enough oil to raise the level to the upper Refilling

Full limit.
EXAMPLE Add
EXAMPLE
CAUTION
Failure to check the oil level regularly Open Close
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
CAUTION
• Do not top up the oil over the upper
limit. Too much oil could destroy
52D084 the engine.
• For cap-type dipstick, screw in it 81A147
It is important to keep the engine oil at the
fully to check the engine oil. Other-
correct level for proper lubrication of your Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly
wise, the stick does not show the
vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with through the filler hole to bring the oil level
correct level, and the engine oil
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful
may be filled over the upper limit.
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle not to overfill. Too much oil is almost as
is on a slope. The oil level should be bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the
checked either before starting the engine engine and allow it to idle for about a
or warm up the engine to normal operating minute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 min-
temperature, then stop the engine and wait utes and check the oil level again.
at least 5 minutes (at least 10 minutes for
Diesel engine model). Changing Engine Oil and Filter
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col- Drain the engine oil while the engine is still
ored yellow for easy identification. Pull out warm.
the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a clean
cloth, insert the dipstick all the way into the
engine (for cap-type dipstick, screw in it
fully), then remove it again. The oil on the
stick should be between the upper and
lower limits shown on the stick. If the oil
level indication is near the lower limit, add
7-9
78KS0-37E

Gasoline engine
WARNING EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
New and used oil can be hazardous. TYPE B
Children and pets may be harmed by
Open Close swallowing new or used oil. Keep
new and used oil and used oil filters
away from children and pets.
Repeated, prolonged contact with
used engine oil may cause skin can- TYPE A
cer.
Brief contact with used oil may irri-
tate skin.
To minimize your exposure to used Loosen
oil, wear a long-sleeve shirt and 65D258
54G091 moisture-proof gloves (such as dish-
1) Remove the oil filler cap. washing gloves) when changing oil. If
2) Remove the engine under cover. oil contacts your skin, wash thor- EXAMPLE
3) Place a drain pan under the drain plug. oughly with soap and water.
4) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug Launder any clothing or rags if wet
and drain out the engine oil. with oil.
Recycle or properly dispose of used
WARNING oil and filters.
The engine oil temperature may be 5) Reinstall the drain plug and gasket.
high enough to burn your fingers Tighten the plug with a wrench to the
when the drain plug is loosened. Wait specified torque.
until the drain plug is cool enough to 6) Reinstall the engine under cover.
touch with your bare hands.
60G306
Tightening torque for drain plug:

Gasoline engine:
35 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25.3 lb-ft)
Diesel engine:
35 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25.3 lb-ft)
7-10
78KS0-37E

Gear Oil: 10
Replace the Oil Filter Tightening (viewed from filter top) Tightening torque for oil filter:
Gasoline engine:
Except 3.2 L engine 3/4 turn or
EXAMPLE 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.1 lb-ft)
Diesel engine:
3/4 turn
CAUTION
To prevent oil leakage, make sure
that the oil filter is tight, but do not
over-tighten it.
NOTE:
• When it is difficult to remove the oil filter,
54G093 we recommend you take your vehicle to
78K055 (1) Oil filter your SUZUKI dealer for oil filter replace-
(2) 3/4 turn or ment.
1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil- 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.1 lb-ft) • For 3.2 L engine, since special proce-
ter counterclockwise and remove it. dures are required, we recommend you
2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount- take your vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer
ing surface on the engine where the
CAUTION
for oil filter replacement.
new filter will be seated. To tighten the oil filter properly, it is
3) Smear a little engine oil around the rub- important to accurately identify the
ber gasket of the new oil filter. position at which the filter gasket
4) Screw on the new filter by hand until the first contacts the mounting surface.
filter gasket contacts the mounting sur-
face. 5) Tighten the filter specified turn from the
point of contact with the mounting sur-
face (or to the specified torque) using
an oil filter wrench.
6) Reinstall the engine under cover.
7-11
78KS0-37E

Gear Oil: 10
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks Engine Coolant (For Diesel Engine Model)
1) Pour oil through the filler hole and
install the filler cap. (For Gasoline Engine Model)
For the approximate capacity of the oil,
refer to the “Capacities” item in the EXAMPLE
“SPECIFICATIONS” section.
2) Start the engine and look carefully for
leaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Run
the engine at various speeds for at least
5 minutes.
3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-
utes. Check the oil level again and add
oil if necessary. Check for leaks again.
CAUTION 64J249
• When replacing the oil filter, it is
recommended that you use a genu- 64J151
WARNING
ine SUZUKI replacement filter. If (For Gasoline Engine Model)
you use an aftermarket filter, make It is hazardous to remove the degas-
sure it is of equivalent quality and EXAMPLE sing tank cap for Diesel engine when
follow the manufacturer’s instruc- the water temperature is high,
tions. because scalding fluid and steam
• Oil leaks from around the oil filter may be blown out under pressure.
or drain plug indicate incorrect Wait until the coolant temperature
installation or gasket damage. If has lowered before removing the cap.
you find any leaks or are not sure
that the filter has been properly
tightened, have the vehicle
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.
60A208S
7-12
78KS0-37E

Gear Oil: 10
Automatic Transmission (AT) Fluid: 10
Selection of Coolant Adding Coolant

CAUTION (For Gasoline Engine Model)
CAUTION To avoid damaging your cooling sys- If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant; tem: mark, more coolant should be added.
SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant is • Always use a high quality ethylene Remove the reservoir tank cap and add
already diluted to the proper percent- glycol base non-silicate type cool- coolant until the reservoir tank level
age. Do not dilute with distilled water ant diluted with distilled water at reaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill the res-
additionally. Doing so may result in the correct mixture concentration. ervoir tank above the “FULL” mark.
the possibility of freezing coolant • Make sure that the proper mix is 50/
and/or overheating. 50 coolant to distilled water and in (For Diesel Engine Model)
no case higher than 70/30. Concen-
To maintain optimum performance and trations greater than 70/30 coolant WARNING
durability of your engine, use SUZUKI to distilled water will cause over-
heating conditions. It is hazardous to remove the degas-
Genuine Coolant or equivalent. sing tank cap for Diesel engine when
• Do not use straight coolant nor
plain water (except SUZUKI LLC: the water temperature is high,
NOTE: because scalding fluid and steam
If you replace the engine coolant other Super (Blue)).
• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi- may be blown out under pressure.
than the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue), follow Wait until the coolant temperature
the schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Standard tives. They may not be compatible
with your cooling system. has lowered before removing the cap.
(Green). To see the detail of the mainte-
nance schedule, refer to “Periodic Mainte- • Do not mix different types of base
coolants. Doing so may result in If the coolant level is below the “MINI”
nance Schedule” in this section.
accelerated seal wear and/or the mark, more coolant should be added.
possibility of severe overheating When the engine is cool, remove the
This type of coolant is best for your cooling
and extensive engine/automatic degassing tank cap by turning it anticlock-
system as it:
transmission damage. wise slowly to release any pressure. And
• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-
add coolant until the degassing tank level
ture.
• Gives proper protection against freezing Coolant Level Check reaches the “MAXI” mark. Never fill the
and boiling. Check the coolant level at the reservoir degassing tank above the “MAXI” mark.
• Gives proper protection against corro- tank, not at the radiator. With the engine
sion and rust. cool, the coolant level should be between
Failure to use the proper coolant can dam- the “FULL (MAXI)” and “LOW (MINI)”
age your cooling system. Your authorized marks.
SUZUKI dealer can help you select the
proper coolant.
7-13
78KS0-37E

Automatic Transmission (AT) Fluid: 10
Coolant Replacement
CAUTION (For Gasoline Engine Model)
• The mixture you use should con- Close
tain 50% concentration of anti-
freeze.
• If the lowest ambient temperature
in your area is expected to be –
35°C (–31°F) or below, use higher
concentrations up to 60% following
the instructions on the antifreeze
container.
• When putting the cap on the reser-
voir tank, line up the arrow on the
cap and the arrow on the tank. Fail- Open 64J235
ure to follow this can result in cool-
ant leakage. 64J189
WARNING
1) When the engine is cool, remove the
WARNING It is hazardous to remove the radiator
radiator cap by turning it slowly to the
cap when the water temperature is
Engine coolant is harmful or fatal if left until a “stop” is felt. Do not press
high, because scalding fluid and
swallowed or inhaled. Do not drink down while turning the cap. Wait until
steam may be blown out under pres-
antifreeze or coolant solution. If swal- any pressure is released, then press
sure. Wait until the coolant tempera-
lowed, do not induce vomiting. Imme- down on the cap and continue turning it
ture has lowered before removing the
diately contact a poison control anticlockwise.
cap.
center or a physician. Avoid inhaling
mist or hot vapors; if inhaled, remove 2) Remove the reservoir by lifting it up,
to fresh air. Wash thoroughly after and drain the reservoir completely.
handling. Solution can be poisonous
to animals. Keep out of the reach of
children and animals.
7-14
78KS0-37E

Engine Coolant: 1, 2
Air Cleaner
EXAMPLE CAUTION
The coolant must be replaced with EXAMPLE
the vehicle on level ground.

Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your
SUZUKI dealer for coolant replacement.
64J191
3) Remove the engine under cover. 66J167

4) Loosen the drain plug attached to the
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there
lower part of the radiator and drain the
will be greater intake resistance, resulting
coolant into a suitable container.
in decreased power output and increased
5) Reinstall the reservoir and fill it with
fuel consumption.
coolant to the “FULL” line.
6) Tighten the drain plug on the radiator. Check and clean periodically according to
7) Reinstall the engine under cover. the following procedure:
8) Fill the radiator with coolant and install 1) Take off the air cleaner case cover.
the radiator cap. Remove the element from the air
9) After filling, let the engine idle for about cleaner case cover.
2–3 minutes to get rid of air in the cool- 2) This air cleaner element is of dry type.
ing system. Remember that it needs cleaning
10)Stop the engine. according to the following method.
11)Check the coolant level in the radiator 3) Blow off dust on cleaner element by
again. If the level has gone down, add compressed air from inside the ele-
more coolant. ment, or replace the element as neces-
sary.
7-15
78KS0-37E

Spark Plugs Type A Type B

EXAMPLE
65D434 65D435
78K056
For Type A, to access the spark plugs: For Type B, to access the spark plugs:
NOTE: 1) Remove the ignition coil cover. 1) Disconnect the coupler (2) while push-
For 3.2L engine, to approach the spark 2) Disconnect the coupler (1) while pushing the release lever.
plugs, you need to remove the bolts shown ing the release lever. 2) Remove the bolts.
in the illustration. 3) Remove the bolt. 3) Pull the spark plug boots out.
4) Pull the ignition coil out.
For nickel spark plugs (traditional type): NOTE:
You should inspect spark plugs periodically When installation, make sure the wires,
for carbon deposits. When carbon accu- couplers, sealing rubber of top cover and
mulates on a spark plug, a strong spark washers, are correctly returned in place.
may not be produced. Remove carbon
deposits with a wire or pin and adjust the
spark plug gap.
7-16
78KS0-37E

Windshield Washer Fluid: 3
CAUTION EXAMPLE Loosen

• (For Type B) When disconnecting Correct Wrong
the spark plug cables, pull on the
boot, not on the cable itself. Pulling Tighten
on the cable can damage it.
• When servicing the iridium/plati-
num spark plugs (slender center
electrode type plugs), do not touch
the center electrode, as it is easy to
damage.
60G102 60G160S
CAUTION CAUTION
• When disconnecting the spark plug • When installing the spark plugs,
cables, pull on the boot, not on the screw them in with your fingers to
cable itself. Pulling on the cable avoid stripping the threads. Tighten
can damage it. with a torque wrench to 25 Nm (2.5
• When servicing the iridium/plati- kg-m, 18.1 lb-ft). Do not allow con-
num spark plugs (slender center taminants to enter the engine
electrode type plugs), do not touch through the spark plug holes when
the center electrode, as it is easy to the plugs are removed.
damage. • Never use spark plugs with the
wrong thread size.
7-17
78KS0-37E

Head Light Washer Fluid:
Air Cleaner: 1, 2
Spark Plugs: 1, 2
Gear Oil Manual transmission oil/Extension

case oil (API GL-4)
Manual Transmission Oil/Extension
Case Oil/Transfer Oil/Differential Oil
75W – 85, 75W – 90
65D571
Front differential oil, rear differential

oil and transfer oil (API GL-5 hypoid)
54G106 90
Spark plug gap “a”
IFR5J11/41-990/BKR6E-11 80W – 90
1.0 – 1.1 mm (0.039 – 0.043 in.)
65D259
CAUTION When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the 65D572
appropriate viscosity and grade as shown
When replacing spark plugs, you
in the chart below.
should use the brand and type speci-
We highly recommend you use:
fied for your vehicle. For the speci-
API GL-4 SAE 75W-90 for manual trans-
fied plugs, refer to the
mission gear oil, extension case oil
“SPECIFICATIONS” section at the
API GL-5 hypoid gear oil SAE 80W-90 for
end of this book. If you wish to use a
front differential oil, rear differential oil and
brand of spark plug other than the
transfer gear oil
specified plugs, consult your SUZUKI
dealer.
7-18
78KS0-37E

Spark Plugs: 1, 2
Manual transmission/Transfer Extension case (2WD) Front/rear differential

Front differential
Manual transmission
(1)
Transfer
(2)
Rear differential
65D260 66J165 64J187
(1) Oil filler and level plug (1) Oil filler and level plug (1) Oil filler and level plug
(2) Oil drain plug (2) Oil drain plug (2) Oil drain plug
7-19
78KS0-37E

Spark Plugs: 1, 2
Brakes: 6
Tightening torque Gear Oil Level Check Gear Oil Change

To check the gear oil level, use the follow- To change the gear oil in the manual trans-
Oil Filler Oil Drain ing procedure: mission, transfer case or differential(s), use
Plug Plug the following procedure:
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with
23 Nm 23 Nm the parking brake applied. Then, stop 1) Remove the oil filler plug (1).
Gasoline 2.3 kg-m 2.3 kg-m
Manual (17.0 lb-ft) (17.0 lb-ft) the engine. 2) Remove the drain plug (2), drain the oil,
trans- 2) Remove the oil filler plug (1). and reinstall the drain plug.
mission 35 Nm 35 Nm 3) Check the inside of the hole with your 3) Pour new gear oil of the specified type
Diesel 3.5 kg-m 3.5 kg-m finger. If the oil level comes up to the through the filler hole until the oil level
(25.3 lb-ft) (25.3 lb-ft) bottom (transfer case: within 10 mm reaches the bottom of the filler hole.
23 Nm 23 Nm from the bottom) of the plug hole, the oil 4) Reinstall the filler plug.
Transfer 2.3 kg-m 2.3 kg-m level is correct. If so, reinstall the plug.
(17.0 lb-ft) (17.0 lb-ft) 4) If the oil level is low, add gear oil
23 Nm 23 Nm through the oil filler plug hole (1) until
Extension case 2.3 kg-m 2.3 kg-m the oil level reaches the bottom of the
(17.0 lb-ft) (17.0 lb-ft) filler hole, then reinstall the plug.
23 Nm 23 Nm
Front differential 2.3 kg-m 2.3 kg-m WARNING
(17.0 lb-ft) (17.0 lb-ft) After driving the vehicle, the gear oil
23 Nm 23 Nm temperature may be high enough to
Rear differential 2.3 kg-m 2.3 kg-m burn you. Wait until the oil filler plug
(17.0 lb-ft) (17.0 lb-ft) is cool enough to touch with your
bare hands before inspecting gear
oil.
CAUTION
When tightening the plug, apply seal-
ing compound “SUZUKI Bond No.
1215” or equivalent to the plug
threads to prevent oil leakage.
7-20
78KS0-37E

Brakes: 6
Clutch Pedal Automatic Transmission (AT) NOTE:

Do not check the fluid level if you have just
Fluid driven the vehicle for a long time at high
speed, if you have driven in city traffic in
Specified Fluid hot weather, or if the vehicle has been pull-
Use an automatic transmission fluid ing a trailer. Wait until the fluid cools down
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309. (about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indica-
tion will not be correct.
Fluid Level Check
3) Park your vehicle on level ground.
CAUTION 4) Apply the parking brake and then start
Driving with too much or too little the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle for
fluid can damage the transmission. two minutes and keep it running during
the fluid level check.
You must check the fluid level with the 5) With your foot on the brake pedal, move
64J154 automatic transmission fluid at normal the gearshift lever through each range,
operating temperature. pausing for about three seconds in
Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera- each range. Then move it back to the
tion and clutch fluid level from time to time. To check the fluid level: “P” (Park) position.
If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully 1) To warm up the transmission fluid, drive
depressed, have the clutch inspected by the vehicle or idle the engine until the WARNING
your SUZUKI dealer. If the clutch fluid level temperature gauge indicates normal
is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the “MAX” operating temperature. Be sure to depress the brake pedal
line with SAE J1703 or DOT-3 brake fluid. 2) Then drive for ten more minutes. when moving the gearshift lever, or
the vehicle can move suddenly.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the specified auto-
matic transmission fluid. Using auto-
matic transmission fluid other than
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309
may damage the automatic transmis-
sion of your vehicle.
7-21
78KS0-37E

Brakes: 6
Fuel Filter (Diesel engine)

EXAMPLE or
F9Q diesel
60A205 64J188
6) The handle of the A/T fluid dipstick is (1) FULL HOT

colored red for easy identification. (2) LOW HOT 78K077
Remove the dipstick, clean it and push (3) The lowest point = Fluid level
The fuel filter works as a water sedimentor
it back in until the cap seats. Then pull
as well.
out the dipstick. 8) Add just enough specified fluid through
7) Check both sides of the dipstick, and the dipstick hole to fill the transmission
Drain water when the fuel filter warning
read the lowest level. The fluid level to the proper level.
light comes on. To drain water:
should be between the two marks in the
1) Place a pan or ample rag under the fuel
“HOT” range on the dipstick. CAUTION filter drain nozzle.
After checking or adding oil, be sure 2) Loosen the drain knob. The water will
to insert the dipstick securely. be drained.
3) Tighten the drain knob when the water
Changing Oil changes to the diesel fuel.
Since special procedures, materials, and 4) Tighten the drain knob.
tools are required to change the automatic
transmission oil, it is recommended that
you trust this job to your authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
7-22
78KS0-37E

Steering: 6
Power Steering: 6
Clutch Pedal: 6
Brakes
WARNING WARNING
Brake Fluid Failure to follow the guidelines below Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-
can result in personal injury or seri- lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-
ous damage to the brake system. tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,
• If the brake fluid in the reservoir do not induce vomiting. Immediately
drops below a certain level, the contact a poison control center or a
brake warning light on the instru- physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,
ment panel will come on (the flush eyes with water and seek medi-
engine must be running with the cal attention. Wash thoroughly after
parking brake fully disengaged). handling. Solution can be poisonous
Should the light come on, immedi- to animals. Keep out of the reach of
ately ask your SUZUKI dealer to children and animals.
inspect the brake system.
• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in NOTE:
the brake system which should be With disc brakes, the fluid level can be
64J154
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer expected to gradually fall as the brake
immediately. pads wear.
Check the brake fluid level by looking at • Brake fluid can harm your eyes and
the reservoir in the engine compartment. damage painted surfaces. Use cau- Brake Pedal
Check that the fluid level is between the tion when refilling the reservoir. Check if the brake pedal stops at the regu-
“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluid • Do not use any fluid other than SAE lar height without “spongy” feeling when
level is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the J1703 or DOT3 brake fluid. Do not you depress it. If not, have the brake sys-
“MAX” line with SAE J1703 or DOT3 brake use reclaimed fluid or fluid that has tem inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. If
fluid. been stored in old or open contain- you doubt the brake pedal for the regular
ers. It is essential that foreign parti- height, check it as follows:
cles and other liquids are kept out
of the brake fluid reservoir.
7-23
78KS0-37E

Tires: 6
Parking Brake
EXAMPLE
54G108 60G104S
54G109
Pedal to wall minimum distance “a”:
70 mm (2.8 in.) WARNING Ratchet tooth specification “b”:
5th – 7th
With the engine running, measure the dis- If you experience any of the following Lever pull force (1):
tance between the brake pedal and floor problems with your vehicle’s brake 200 N (20 kg, 44 lbs)
wall when the pedal is depressed with system, have the vehicle inspected
approximately 300 N (30 kg, 66 lbs) of immediately by your SUZUKI dealer. Check the parking brake for proper adjust-
force. The minimum distance required is as • Poor braking performance ment by counting the number of clicks
specified. Since your vehicle’s brake sys- • Uneven braking (Brakes not work- made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly
tem is self-adjusting, there is no need for ing uniformly on all wheels.) pull up on the parking brake lever to the
pedal adjustment. • Excessive pedal travel point of full engagement. The parking
If the pedal to floor wall distance as mea- • Brake dragging brake lever should stop between the speci-
sured above is less than the minimum dis- • Excessive noise fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels
tance required, have your vehicle • Pedal pulsation (Pedal pulsates should be securely locked. If the parking
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. when depressed.) brake is not properly adjusted or the
brakes drag after the lever has been fully
NOTE: released, have the parking brake inspected
When measuring the distance between the and/or adjusted by your SUZUKI dealer.
brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to
include the floor mat or rubber on the floor
wall in your measurement.
7-24
78KS0-37E

Tires: 6
Steering Power Steering (if equipped) Tires

EXAMPLE
(1)
“c”
(2)
78K080 64J155 54G307
Steering wheel play “c”: (1) UPPER The front and rear tire pressure specifica-
0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.) (2) LOWER tions for your vehicle are listed on the Tire
Information Label. Both the front and rear
Check the play of the steering wheel by Check the steering box case, vane pump tires should have the specified tire pres-
gently turning it from left to right and mea- and hose connections for leaks or damage. sure.
suring the distance that it moves before Note that the value does not apply to the
you feel slight resistance. The play should Power Steering Fluid compact spare tire, if equipped.
be between the specified values. Check the fluid level by looking at the res-
Check that the steering wheel turns easily ervoir in the engine compartment when the
and smoothly without rattling by turning it fluid is cold (about room temperature).
all the way to the right and to the left while Check that the fluid level is between the (1)
driving very slowly in an open area. If the and (2) lines. If the fluid level is near the (2)
amount of free play is outside the specifi- line, fill it up to the (1) line with an auto-
cation or you find anything else to be matic transmission fluid equivalent to ATF
wrong, an inspection must be performed DEXRON®-II (Esso JWS 2326) or
by your SUZUKI dealer. DEXRON®-III. Do not overfill.
7-25
78KS0-37E

Tires: 6
Tire Inspection
Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a EXAMPLE WARNING
month by performing the following checks:
Hitting curbs and running over rocks
1) Measure the air pressure with a tire can damage tires and affect wheel
gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces- alignment. Be sure to have tires and
sary. Remember to check the spare wheel alignment checked periodically
tire, too. by your SUZUKI dealer.
WARNING 4) Check for loose wheel nuts.

• Air pressures should be checked 5) Check that there are no nails, stones or
when the tires are cold or you may other objects sticking into the tires.
get inaccurate readings.
• Check the inflation pressure from WARNING
time to time while inflating the tire 54G136
• Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires
gradually, until the specified pres- (1) Tread wear indicator which are all the same type and
sure is obtained. (2) Indicator location mark size. This is important to ensure
• Never underinflate or overinflate proper steering and handling of the
the tires. 2) Check that the depth of the tread vehicle. Never mix tires of different
Underinflation can cause unusual groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). size or type on the four wheels of
handling characteristics or can To help you check this, the tires have your vehicle. The size and type of
cause the rim to slip on the tire molded-in tread wear indicators in the tires used should be only those
bead, resulting in an accident or grooves. When the indicators appear approved by SUZUKI as standard
damage to the tire or rim. on the tread surface, the remaining or optional equipment for your
Overinflation can cause the tire to depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) vehicle.
burst, resulting in personal injury. or less and the tire should be replaced. • Replacing the wheels and tires
Overinflation can also cause 3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and equipped on your vehicle with cer-
unusual handling characteristics damage. Any tires with cracks or other tain combinations of aftermarket
which may result in an accident. damage should be replaced. If any tires wheels and tires can significantly
show abnormal wear, have them change the steering and handling
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. characteristics of your vehicle.
• Therefore, use only those wheel
and tire combinations approved by
SUZUKI as standard or optional
equipment for your vehicle.
7-26
78KS0-37E

Tires: 6
Tire Rotation vehicle, and must use a 4-tire rotation as

CAUTION Vehicle equipped with 225/70R16 tires shown in the example below.
have a spare wheel and tire that are the
Replacing the original tires with tires same size as the wheels and tires on the 4-tire rotation
of a different size may result in false vehicle, and can use a 5-tire rotation as
speedometer or odometer readings. shown in the example below. Front
Check with your SUZUKI dealer
before purchasing replacement tires 5-tire rotation
that differ in size from the original
tires.
65D459
To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to

prolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-
trated. Tires should be rotated every 10000
66J119 km (6000 miles). After rotation, adjust front
and rear tire pressures to the specification
WARNING listed on your vehicle’s Tire Information
Label.
Never perform a 5-tire rotation when
the type and size of the spare wheel
and tire are not the same as the other
wheels and tires equipped on your
vehicle.
Vehicle equipped with 225/65R17 tires

have a spare wheel and tire that are a dif-
ferent size than the wheels and tires on the
7-27
78KS0-37E

Battery: 9
Fuses: 7
Battery
WARNING WARNING
Vehicle equipped with 225/65R17 (Continued) WARNING
tires have a spare wheel and tire that • Replace the spare tire with a new
• Batteries produce flammable
are a different size than the wheels one as soon as the tread wear indi-
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and
and tires on the vehicle. The spare cator appears.
sparks away from the battery or an
wheel and tire on these vehicles are • When replacing the spare tire, use
explosion may occur. Never smoke
intended for temporary emergency a replacement tire with the exact
when working in the vicinity of the
use only. The wheel is painted yellow same size and construction.
battery.
to remind you that the wheel and tire
• When checking or servicing the
are for temporary use only. Continu-
battery, disconnect the negative
ous use of this spare can result in tire
cable. Be careful not to cause a
failure and loss of control. Always
short circuit by allowing metal
observe these precautions when
objects to contact the battery posts
using this spare:
and the vehicle at the same time.
• Be aware that your vehicle will han-
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-
dle differently with this temporary
age to your vehicle or battery, fol-
spare.
low the jump starting instructions
• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)
in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”
speed.
section of this manual if it is neces-
• Replace the temporary spare with a
sary to jump start your vehicle.
standard tire and wheel as soon as
possible.
• Do not operate your vehicle in “4H
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” with this tem-
porary spare.
• Do not use tire chains on the spare
tire. If you must use tire chains,
rearrange the wheels so standard
tires and wheels are fitted to the
rear axle.
(Continued)
7-28
78KS0-37E

Fuses: 7
Fuses The main fuse and primary fuses are

EXAMPLE (traditional type) located in the engine compartment. If the
Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as
main fuse blows, no electrical component
described below:
will function. If a primary fuse blows, no
Main fuse electrical component in the corresponding
The main fuse takes current directly from load group will function. When replacing
the battery. the main fuse or a primary fuse, use a gen-
uine SUZUKI replacement.
Primary fuses
These fuses are between the main fuse
PRIMARY
and individual fuses, and are for electrical INDIVIDUAL FUSE
FUSE
load groups.
Individual fuses 60A LAMP Head light, Accessory,
These fuses are for individual electrical cir- Dome light, Sunroof,
54G118 cuits. Hazard light, Door lock,
Rear fog light, Stop
For maintenance-free battery (cap-less lamp, Tail light
type), you need not add water. For tradi-
tional type battery, which has water filler 50A IGN 2 Wiper/Washer, Power
caps, the level of the battery solution must window, Seat heater
be kept between the “UPPER” and the
“LOWER” level lines at all times. If the level 40A 4WD 4WD actuator
is found to be below the “LOWER” level 30A RDTR 1 Radiator fan
line, add distilled water to the “UPPER”
level line. You should periodically check the 30A RDTR 2 Radiator fan
battery, battery terminals, and battery
hold-down bracket for corrosion. Remove
corrosion using a stiff brush and ammonia
mixed with water, or baking soda mixed
with water. After removing corrosion, rinse
with clean water.
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for
a month or longer, disconnect the cable
from the negative terminal of the battery to
help prevent discharge.
7-29
78KS0-37E

Fuses: 7
Fuses in the Engine Compartment Head light low beam

Main Fuse / Primary Fuse (20) 15A H/L LO R fuse, right
(1) 15A CPRSR A/C compressor fuse (21) 80A All electric load
(2) 20A O2 HTR O2 sensor heater
fuse
(3) 15A THR MOT Throttle motor fuse
(1)
(4) 20A AT Automatic transmis-
(2)
sion fuse
(5)
(6) (5) 25A RR DEF Rear defogger fuse

(3)
(6) 15A HORN Horn fuse
(7) (4)
(7) 20A FR FOG Front fog light fuse

(8)
(8) 20A MRR HTR Mirror heater fuse

(20) (19)
Front blower motor

(9) 40A FR BLW
(18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13) (12) (11) (10) (9) fuse
(10) 30A ABS 2 ABS actuator fuse
(12) 20A FI Main fuse
Head light cleaner
(21) (13) 30A H/L CLNR
fuse
(14) 10A H/L L Head light fuse, left
(15) 10A H/L R Head light fuse, right
64J232 (16) 10A H/L Head light fuse
(17) 40A ST Starter motor fuse
(18) 40A IGN Ignition fuse
(19) 15A H/L LO L Head light low beam

fuse, left
7-30
78KS0-37E

Fuses: 7
(For Diesel Engine Model) (22) 50A Water thermo plug

Main Fuse / Primary Fuse
(23) 50A Water thermo plug
(1) 30A F/HTR Fuel heater
(24) 80A Glow relay
(2) 10A C PUMP Turbo charger pump
(25) 150A All electric load
(3) 15A CPRSR Air conditioner
(4) 10A F/P Fuel pump
(5)
(6) (5) 25A RR DEF Rear defogger fuse

(1)
(6) 15A HORN Horn fuse
(7) (2)
(8)
(3) (7) 20A FR FOG Front fog light fuse
(4)
(20) (19)
(8) 20A MRR HTR Mirror heater fuse
(9) 40A FR BLW Front blower motor

(18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13) (12) (11) (10) (9) fuse
(21) (12) 30A FI Main fuse
H/L CLNR Head light cleaner

(22)
(25) (13) 30A
fuse
(23)
(24)
(14) 10A H/L L Head light fuse, left
(15) 10A H/L R Head light fuse, right
(16) 10A H/L Head light fuse
64J233
(17) 40A ST Starter motor fuse
(18) 40A IGN Ignition fuse
(19) 15A H/L LO L Blank
(20) 15A H/L LO R Blank
(21) 50A Water thermo plug
7-31
78KS0-37E

Fuses: 7
Headlight Aiming: 7
Fuse under the Dash Board Radio, Remote door

(A) 10A DOME Dome lamp fuse (T) 15A ACC mirror fuse
Fuse box
(B) 10A STOP Stop lamp fuse (U) 10A METER Meter fuse
(For Gasoline and Diesel Engine Model)
(C) 7.5A RR FOG Rear fog light fuse (V) 10A IG COIL Ignition coil fuse
Accessory socket (W) 20A P/W T Power window fuse
(D) 15A ACC 3
fuse
(X) 30A P/W Power window fuse
(E) 10A CRUISE Cruise control fuse
Cigar or Accessory
(F) 15A ACC 2
socket fuse
(G) 20A WIP Wiper fuse
Ignition signal & Seat
(H) 15A IG2 SIG heater fuse
(I) 10A BACK Back lamp fuse
64J192 (J) 10A ABS/ESP ABS or ESP control-

ler fuse
(K) 10A A/B Air bag fuse
(L) 15A RADIO Radio fuse
(M) 15A HAZ Hazard light fuse
FUSES AND RELAYS ONLY
SPARE
SPARE SPARE SPARE
SPARE
USE THE DESIGNATED
(K) (J) (I) (H) (G) (F) (E) (D) (C) (B) (A) (N) 7.5A ST SIG Starter signal fuse
SPARE
Engine control
(V) (U) (T) (S) (R) (Q) (P) (O) (N) (M) (L) (O) 10A ECM
module fuse
(X) (W)
(P) 25A S/R Sun roof motor fuse
(Q) 25A B/U Buck up fuse
(R) 10A TAIL Tail light fuse
79K057 Door lock actuator

(S) 20A D/L
fuse
7-32
78KS0-37E

Bulb Replacement: 7
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
OK
BLOWN
OK BLOWN
65D045 60G111 81A283
The individual fuse box is located under

the driver’s side of the dashboard. The WARNING WARNING
amperage is shown on the each fuse.
If the main fuse or a primary fuse Always be sure to replace a blown
blows, be sure to have your vehicle fuse with a fuse of the correct amper-
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI age. Never use a substitute such as
dealer. Always use a genuine SUZUKI aluminum foil or wire to replace a
replacement. Never use a substitute blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and
such as a wire even for a temporary the new one blows in a short period
repair, or extensive electrical damage of time, you may have a major electri-
and a fire can result. cal problem. Have your vehicle
inspected immediately by your
SUZUKI dealer.
NOTE:
Make sure that the fuse box always carries
spare fuses.
7-33
78KS0-37E

Bulb Replacement: 7
Headlight Aiming Head Light Washer Fluid Bulb Replacement

Since special procedures are required, we Check that there is washer fluid in the tank.
recommend you take your vehicle to your Refill it if necessary. WARNING
SUZUKI dealer for headlight alignment.
• Light bulbs can be hot enough to
CAUTION burn your finger right after being
• In winter season, be sure to remove turned off. This is true especially
snow or ice on the nozzle holder at for halogen headlight bulbs.
the front bumper before operating Replace the bulbs after they
head light washer. become cool enough.
• To avoid the frozen damage to the • The headlight bulbs are filled with
nozzle of the head light washer, be pressurized halogen gas. They can
sure to use the specific washer burst and injure you if they are hit
fluid. or dropped. Handle them carefully.
CAUTION
The oils from your skin may cause a
halogen bulb to overheat and burst
when the lights are on. Grasp a new
bulb with a clean cloth.
CAUTION
Frequent replacement of a bulb indi-
cates the need for an inspection of
the electrical system. This should be
carried out by your SUZUKI dealer.
7-34
78KS0-37E

Bulb Replacement: 7
Center Interior Light (if equipped) Rear Interior Light (if equipped) Spot Light (if equipped)
Pull down the lens by using a plane screw
driver covered with a soft cloth as shown.
Ceiling-mount type (if equipped)
64J159 64J160
Pull down the lens by using a plane screw Pull down the lens by using a plane screw
driver covered with a soft cloth as shown. driver covered with a soft cloth as shown.
To install it, simply push it back in. To install it, simply push it back in. 79K061
The bulb can be removed by simply pulling The bulb can be removed by simply pulling Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-
it out. When replacing the bulb, make sure it out. terclockwise. Pull out the bulb.
that the contact springs are holding the
bulb securely.
7-35
78KS0-37E

Bulb Replacement: 7
Headlight Open the engine hood. Disconnect the High beam

coupler. Remove the sealing rubber.
Low beam
• Halogen headlamp Push the retaining spring forward and
unhook it. Then remove the bulb. Install a
new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
• Discharge headlamp
SUZUKI dealer for bulb replacement.
78F072
Open the engine hood. Disconnect the

79K089 coupler while pushing the lock release.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise to
remove it.
66J108
7-36
78KS0-37E

Bulb Replacement: 7
Front Fog Light

(1)
(3) (4)
(2)
79K091 78F072
79K090
3) Remove the clip (4) with the same way 4) Open the fender cover. Disconnect the
1) Insert a flat blade screw driver into the as No.1). coupler with pushing the lock release.
hole (2) and remove the clips (1) by Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
twist the driver as shown in the illustra- and remove it.
tion.
2) Remove the bolt (3) by a Phillips-head
screw driver.
7-37
78KS0-37E

Bulb Replacement: 7
Other General Lights Bulb Parking light

Front turn signal light
Bulb holder
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(2) (1)
(1)
(3)
(2) (4)
(1) (2)
54G124
64J163
54G123 (3) Removal
(4) Installation To replace the bulb of parking/turn signal
(1) Removal light, follow the procedure for the bulb
(2) Installation There are two types of bulb, “Full glass replacement of the “Front Fog Light”.
type” (1) and “Glass/metal type” (2).
To remove a bulb holder from a light hous-
ing, turn the holder counterclockwise and To remove and install a full glass type bulb
pull it out. To install the holder, push the (1), simply pull out or push in the bulb.
holder in and turn it clockwise. To remove a glass metal type bulb (2) from
a bulb holder, push in the bulb and turn it
counterclockwise. To install a new bulb,
push it in and turn it clockwise.
You can access the individual bulb or bulb
holders as follows.
7-38
78KS0-37E

Bulb Replacement: 7
Rear combination light Side turn signal light License plate light
EXAMPLE
64J164 64J195 75F087
As the bulb is built-in type, the light assem- Door illumination light
bly must be replaced. Remove the light
assembly by sliding the light housing left-
ward with your finger.
64J165
7-39
78KS0-37E

Wiper Blades: 3
Luggage compartment light High-mount stop light (if equipped)

The followings are the general procedure
for replace the bulbs of high-mount stop
light.
SUZUKI dealer for the bulbs of high-mount
stop light replacement.
(1)
64J182
64J166
2) Release the claws of the light housing
by the flat head etc. through the service
holes as shown in the illustration.
64J181
To remove a high-mounted stop light hous-

ing the following procedure:
1) Open the tailgate, and remove the trim
(1) as shown in the illustration.
7-40
78KS0-37E

Wiper Blades: 3
Wiper Blades
(2)
64J183 64J184
3) Close the tailgate. Remove a high- 4) Remove the each bulb. 54G129
mounted stop light housing (2) from the 5) Replace the bulbs.
If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-
tailgate. To install a high-mounted stop light
aged, or make streaks when wiping,
housing in the reverse order of removal.
replace the wiper blades.
To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-
cedures below.
CAUTION
To avoid scratching or breaking the
window, do not let the wiper arm
strike the window while replacing the
wiper blade.
NOTE:
Some wiper blades may be different from
the ones described here depending on
vehicle specifications. If so, consult your
SUZUKI dealer for proper replacement
method.
7-41
78KS0-37E

Wiper Blades: 3
For windshield wipers: Type A (Removal)

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE 60A260
70G119
Type A (Installation)
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-
dow.
54G130
2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2)

and remove the wiper frame from the
54G132
arm as shown.
3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper blade (1) Locked end
and slide the blade out as shown.
7-42
78KS0-37E

Wiper Blades: 3
Air Conditioning System: 4
Type B (Removal) Type C
54G135
54G133 65D151
(1) Retainer
Type B (Installation) NOTE:
For Type C, do not flex the wiper blade
4) If the new blade is provided without the
frame end more than necessary. If you do,
two metal retainers, move them from
it can break off.
the old blade to the new one.
5) Install the new blade in the reverse
order of removal, with the locked end
positioned toward the wiper arm
(except Type C).
Make sure the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks. Lock the
blade end into place.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making
sure that the lock lever is snapped
securely into the arm.
54G134
(1) Locked end
7-43
78KS0-37E

For rear wipers:
65D151 54G135
NOTE: (1) Retainer

Do not flex the wiper blade frame end
more than necessary. If you do, it can 4) If the new blade is provided without the
break off. two metal retainers, move them from
the old blade to the new one.
5) Install the new blade in the reverse
order of removal.
Make sure the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the
reverse order of removal.
80G146
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-

dow.
2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm
as shown.
3) Slide the blade out as shown.
7-44
78KS0-37E

Windshield Washer Fluid fluid tank. If the fluid level is near empty, Air Conditioning System
refill it. If you do not use the air conditioner for a
Front and rear (if equipped) long period, such as during winter, it may
Use a good quality windshield washer
EXAMPLE fluid, diluted with water as necessary. not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
WARNING mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Do not use “antifreeze” solution in Operate the air conditioner at least once a
the windshield washer reservoir. This month for one minute with the engine
can severely impair visibility when idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
sprayed on the windshield, and can and helps protect the internal components.
also damage your vehicle’s paint.
CAUTION
(or opposite side)
Damage may result if the washer
66J008 motor is operated with no fluid in the
washer tank.
66J116
Check that there is washer fluid in the tank

by looking at the washer fluid level gauge
which is attached to the cap of the washer
7-45
78KS0-37E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1
Spare Tire Nut Lock
(if equipped) ......................................................................... 8-1
Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-2
Changing Wheels ................................................................ 8-3
Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-7
Towing .................................................................................. 8-9
Emergency Remedies ......................................................... 8-10
60G411
78KS0-37E

Jacking Instructions: 5
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire Changing Tool Spare Tire Nut Lock

WARNING
(if equipped)
After using the tire changing tools,
be sure to stow them securely, or
they could be thrown about in an
accident, causing injury.
To UNLOCK
To LOCK
64J124
The jack, wheel brace and jack handle are 64J172

stowed in the rear left corner of the lug-
A nut lock is used for the spare tire. To
gage compartment. Remove the cover to
unlock the spare tire nut, insert the ignition
access the tools.
key into the lock as far as the key will go
To remove the jack, turn its shaft counter- and remove the lock with the key in. To lock
clockwise and pull the jack out of the stor- the spare tire nut, put the lock on the nut
age bracket. To stow the jack, place it in and push the lock in.
the storage bracket and turn the shaft
clockwise until the jack is securely held in
place.
WARNING
The tire changing tools should be
used only to change wheels. It is
important to read the jacking instruc-
tions in this section before attempt-
ing to use the jack.
8-1
78KS0-37E

Jacking Instructions: 5
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Jacking Instructions jack-head groove fits around the jacking

point beneath the vehicle body.
(3)
(1)
64J194 (2)
75F062 (1) Jacking point

79K059
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.
2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift (2) Jack handle
into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has an (3) Wheel brace
automatic transmission, or shift into “R”
(Reverse) if your vehicle has a manual 7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and
transmission. smoothly until the tire clears the
3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if (1) ground. Do not raise the vehicle more
your vehicle is near traffic. than necessary.
4) Block the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the wheel being
lifted.
5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel
being lifted as shown in the illustration
in case that the jack slips.
79K058
(1) Jacking point
6) Position the jack as shown in the illus-

tration and raise the jack by turning the
8-2
78KS0-37E

Jump Starting Instructions: 9, 10
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Changing Wheels
WARNING To change a wheel, use the following pro-
• Use the jack only to change wheels cedure:
on level, hard ground.
• Never jack up the vehicle on an To remove the spare wheel:
inclined surface. 1) Remove the jack and tools from the
vehicle. (2)
• Never raise the vehicle with the
jack in a location other than the
designated jacking point near the
wheel to be changed. (A)
• Make sure that the jack is raised at
least 51 mm (2 inches) before it (1)
contacts the flange. Use of the jack
when it is within 51 mm (2 inches) 78K058
of being fully collapsed may result
in failure of the jack. 3) Unhook the under claws (1) and the
• Never get under the vehicle when it middle claws (2) one by one.
is supported by the jack.
• Never run the engine when the
(3)
vehicle is supported by the jack
and never allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle. 78K057
2) Release the lock at the underneath of

the spare wheel full cover (A) as shown
in the illustration.
78K059
4) Unhook the upper claws (3), and

remove the wheel full cover.
8-3
78KS0-37E

Jump Starting Instructions: 9, 10
Towing: 6
EMERGENCY SERVICE
NOTE: facing the wheel. Tighten each nut

Remove the full wheel cover from the bot- snugly by hand until the wheel is
tom part to the upper part. Otherwise, the (B) securely seated on the hub.
claws may be broken.
(Half cover type)
64J180
(4) 5) Pull out the lock cover (B) fitted on the EXAMPLE
(5) lock nut of the spare wheel while insert-
81A057
ing the key full into the key hole of the
lock cover (B). Tightening torque for wheel nut
78K060 6) Remove the lock nut and wheel nuts of 100 Nm (10.0 kg-m, 72.3 lb-ft)
the spare wheel, then remove the spare
NOTE: 6) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts
wheel with both hands.
If your vehicle is equipped with the half in a crisscross fashion with a wrench as
cover, remove the center bolt (4), then shown in the illustration.
To change the wheel:
remove the outer cover (5) of the spare
1) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel
wheel half cover.
nuts.
2) Jack up the vehicle. (follow the jacking
instructions in this section)
3) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.
4) Before installing the new wheel, clean
any mud or dirt off from the surface of
the wheel and hub with a clean cloth.
Clean the hub carefully; it may be hot
from driving.
5) Install the new wheel and replace the
wheel nuts with their cone shaped end
8-4
78KS0-37E

Towing: 6
EMERGENCY SERVICE
To install the wheel:

WARNING
Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten
them to the specified torque as soon (1)
as possible after changing wheels.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly (2)
tightened wheel nuts may come (4)
loose or fall off, which can result in
an accident. If you do not have a
torque wrench, have the wheel nut
torque checked by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
(3)
78K062
78K061
2) Put the spare tire nut lock (4) on the
1) Install the wheel with both hands to the spare tire nut and push the lock in.
spare tire carrier (1) as shown in the 3) Install the wheel cover in the reverse
illustration. order to removal.
Then tighten the wheel nuts (2) and
spare tire nut (3).
8-5
78KS0-37E

Emergency Remedies: 9, 2
EMERGENCY SERVICE
(3) WARNING
Vehicle equipped with 225/65R17
tires have a spare wheel and tire that
are a different size than the wheels
and tires on the vehicle. The spare
(5)
wheel and tire on these vehicles are
intended for temporary emergency
(4) use only. The wheel is painted yellow
to remind you that the wheel and tire
are for temporary use only. Continu-
ous use of this spare can result in tire
failure and loss of control. Always
78K063 64J196
observe these precautions when
using this spare:
NOTE: • Be aware that your vehicle will han-
When you install the spare tire full cover, CAUTION dle differently with this temporary
make sure the position of the upper claws spare.
marked on outside (5) and holes, then To avoid the removal of the spare
wheel full cover while driving, be • Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)
hook them first. speed.
sure to fit the claws (3) of the outer
cover of the spare wheel full cover to • Replace the temporary spare with a
each hole (4) of the inner cover of the standard tire and wheel as soon as
spare wheel full cover. possible.
• Do not operate your vehicle in “4H
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” with this tem-
porary spare.
• Do not use tire chains on the spare
tire. If you must use tire chains,
rearrange the wheels so standard
tires and wheels are fitted to the
rear axle.
(Continued)
8-6
78KS0-37E

If You Can Not Shift Automatic Transmission Gearshift
Lever Out of “P” (PARK):
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Jump Starting Instructions

WARNING CAUTION
(Continued) WARNING Your vehicle should not be started by
• Replace the spare tire with a new pushing or towing. This starting
• Never attempt to jump start your
one as soon as the tread wear indi- method could result in permanent
vehicle if the battery appears to be
cator appears. damage to the catalytic converter.
frozen. Batteries in this condition
• When replacing the spare tire, use Use jump leads to start a vehicle with
may explode or rupture if jump
a replacement tire with the exact a weak or flat battery.
starting is attempted.
same size and construction.
• When making jump lead connec-
tions, be certain that your hands
and the jump leads remain clear
from pulleys, belts, or fans.
• Batteries produce flammable
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and
sparks away from the battery or an
explosion may occur. Never smoke
when working in the vicinity of the
battery.
• If the booster battery you use for
jump starting is installed in another
vehicle, make sure the two vehicles
are not touching each other.
• If your battery discharges repeat-
edly, for no apparent reason, have
your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer.
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-
age to your vehicle or battery, fol-
low the jump starting instructions
below precisely and in order.
If you are in doubt, call for qualified
road service.
8-7
78KS0-37E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
When Jump Starting Your Vehicle,

Use the Following Procedure: EXAMPLE WARNING
Never connect the jump lead directly
to the negative (–) terminal of the dis-
charged battery, or an explosion may
occur.
4) If the booster battery you are using is

fitted to another vehicle, start the
engine of the vehicle with the booster
battery. Run the engine at moderate
speed.
5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the
65D437 flat battery.
6) Remove the jump leads in the exact
3) Make jump lead connections as follows: reverse order in which you connected
60A269
1. Connect one end of the first jump them.
1) Use only a 12 volt battery to jump start lead to the positive (+) terminal of
your vehicle. Position the good 12 V the flat battery (1).
battery close to your vehicle so that the 2. Connect the other end to the positive
jump leads will reach both batteries. (+) terminal of the booster battery
When using a battery installed on (2).
another vehicle, DO NOT LET THE 3. Connect one end of the second jump
VEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parking lead to the negative (–) terminal of
brakes fully on both vehicles. the booster battery (2).
2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except 4. Make the final connection to an
those necessary for safety reasons (for unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.
example, headlights or hazard lights). engine hook (3)) of the engine of the
vehicle with the flat battery (1).
8-8
78KS0-37E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Towing Towing a Disabled Vehicle

If you need to have your vehicle towed, WARNING If your vehicle is disabled, your vehicle can
contact a professional service. Your dealer be towed by a tow truck with the front
When you tow your vehicle, follow wheels lifted, according to the instructions
can provide you with detailed towing the instructions below to avoid acci-
instructions. below.
dents and damage to your vehicle.
Before towing
WARNING
A safety chain should always be used
when you tow your vehicle.
CAUTION
To help avoid damage to your vehicle
during towing, proper equipment and
towing procedures must be used.
CAUTION
54G587
If vehicle damage (such as steering 64J147
or drivetrain damage, inability to
NOTE:
operate free axle mechanism, etc.)
If your vehicle is equipped with the transfer
prevent normal use of the towing pro-
switch, and if the steering and drive train
cedures for your vehicle described in
are in good condition and the engine can
the “Towing Your Vehicle (recre-
be started, the vehicle may also be towed
ational towing)” section, have your
according to the instructions in the “Towing
vehicle towed with two wheels lifted
Your Vehicle (recreational towing)” section.
by the tow truck and the other two
wheels on a towing dolly.
Front wheels lifted
It may be towed by a tow truck with the
front wheels lifted and a dolly under the
rear wheels.
64J236
8-9
78KS0-37E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Emergency Remedies
Front wheels lifted (all models)
If the Starter Does Not Operate
1) Try turning the ignition switch to the
“START” position with the headlights
turned on to determine the battery con-
dition. If the headlights go excessively
dim or go off, it usually means that
either the battery is flat or the battery
terminal contact is poor. Recharge the
battery or correct battery terminal con-
tact as necessary.
2) If the headlights remain bright, check
the fuses. If the reason for failure of the
starter is not obvious, there may be a
major electrical problem. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
If the Engine is Flooded

If the engine is flooded with gasoline, it
may be hard to start. If this happens, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. (Do not operate the starter motor
for more than 15 seconds).
65D098
8-10
78KS0-37E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
If the Engine Overheats If the temperature indication does not

The engine could overheat temporarily come down to within the normal, accept-
under severe driving conditions. If the able range:
engine coolant temperature gauge indi- 1) Turn off the engine and check that the
cates overheating during driving: water pump belt and pulleys are not
1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped. damaged or slipping. If any abnormality
2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and is found, correct it.
park. 2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.
3) Let the engine run at normal idle speed If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”
for a few minutes until the indicator is line, look for leaks at the radiator, water
within the normal, acceptable tempera- pump, and radiator and heater hoses. If
ture range between “H” and “C”. you locate any leaks that may have
caused the overheating, do not run the
WARNING engine until these problems have been 64J235
If you see or hear escaping steam, corrected.
stop the vehicle in a safe place and 3) If you do not find a leak, carefully add
immediately turn off the engine to let coolant to the reservoir and then the WARNING
it cool. Do not open the hood when radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine • It is hazardous to remove the radia-
steam is present. When the steam Coolant” in the “Inspection and Mainte- tor cap when the water temperature
can no longer be seen or heard, open nance” section.) is high, because scalding fluid and
the hood to see if the coolant is still steam may be blown out under
boiling. If it is, you must wait until it pressure. The cap should only be
stops boiling before you proceed. taken off when the coolant temper-
ature has lowered.
• To help prevent personal injury,
keep hands, tools and clothing
away from the engine cooling fan
and air-conditioner fan (if
equipped). These electric fans can
automatically turn on without warn-
ing.
8-11
78KS0-37E

APPEARANCE CARE
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1
Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-2
60G412 9
78KS0-37E

Corrosion Prevention: 5
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Prevention vehicle which are not well ventilated to wash off, an additional cleaner may be
permit quick drying. required. Be sure that any cleaner you use
It is important to take good care of your
is not harmful to painted surfaces and is
vehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listed This information illustrates the necessity of specifically intended for your purposes.
below are instructions for how to maintain keeping your vehicle (particularly the Follow the manufacturer’s directions when
your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It using these special cleaners.
read and follow these instructions carefully. is equally important to repair any damage
to the paint or protective coatings as soon
Important Information About as possible. WARNING
Corrosion Foreign material can lodge between
Common causes of corrosion
How to Help Prevent Corrosion the fuel tank of your vehicle and the
skid plate which covers it. You
1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, mois- Wash your vehicle frequently should periodically clean out any for-
ture, or chemicals in hard to reach The best way to preserve the finish on your eign material which has accumu-
areas of the vehicle underbody or vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to lated in this area, since it could
frame. keep it clean with frequent washing. create a fire hazard.
2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to Wash your vehicle at least once during the
treated or painted metal surfaces result- winter and once immediately after the win-
ing from minor accidents or abrasion by ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the Repair finish damage
stones and gravel. underside, as clean and dry as possible. Carefully examine your vehicle for damage
If you frequently drive on salted roads, to the painted surfaces. Should you find
Environmental conditions which accel- your vehicle should be washed at least any chips or scratches in the paint, touch
erate corrosion once a month during the winter. If you live them up immediately to prevent corrosion
1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea near the ocean, your vehicle should be from starting. If the chips or scratches have
air or industrial pollution will all acceler- washed at least once a month throughout gone through to the bare metal, have a
ate the corrosion of metal. the year. qualified body shop make the repair.
2) High humidity will increase the rate of
corrosion particularly when the temper- For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi- Keep passenger and luggage compart-
ature range is just above the freezing cle Cleaning” section. ments clean
point. Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate
3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle Remove foreign material deposits under the floor mats and may cause corro-
for an extended period of time may pro- Foreign material such as salts, chemicals, sion. Occasionally, check under these
mote corrosion even though other body road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and mats to ensure that this area is clean and
sections may be completely dry. industrial fall-out may damage the finish of dry. More frequent checks are necessary if
4) High temperatures will cause an accel- your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces. the vehicle is used off road or in wet
erated rate of corrosion to parts of the Remove these types of deposits as quickly weather.
as possible. If these deposits are difficult to
9-1
78KS0-37E

Corrosion Prevention: 5
Vehicle Cleaning: 5
APPEARANCE CARE
Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertiliz- Vehicle Cleaning

ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor- WARNING
rosive by nature. These products should
be transported in sealed containers. If a Do not apply additional undercoating
spill or leak does occur, clean and dry the or rust preventive coating on or
area immediately. around exhaust system components
such as the catalytic converter,
Use mud and gravel shields exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be
The use of mud and gravel shields will help started if the undercoating substance
protect your vehicle, especially if you fre- becomes overheated.
quently drive on gravel or salted roads.
Full-size shields, which extend as close to
the road as is practical, are the best. The
fittings for such shields should also be cor-
rosion resistant. Please check with your
authorized SUZUKI dealer for information 76G044S
on these shields.
Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti- WARNING

lated area When cleaning the interior or exterior
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly of the vehicle, NEVER USE flammable
ventilated area. If you often wash your solvents such as lacquer thinners,
vehicle in the garage or if you frequently gasoline, benzene or cleaning materi-
drive it in when wet, your garage may be als such as bleaches or strong
damp. The high humidity in the garage household detergents. The materials
may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet could cause personal injury or dam-
vehicle may corrode even in a heated age to the vehicle.
garage if the ventilation is poor.
9-2
78KS0-37E

Vehicle Cleaning: 5
APPEARANCE CARE
Cleaning the Interior and precautions. Do not use solvent type These chemicals may stain and discolor
cleaners or abrasive cleaners. the instrument panel and console.
Vinyl upholstery
Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-
gent mixed with warm water. Apply the
Seat belts Cleaning the Exterior
Clean seat belts with a mild soap and
solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft water. Do not use bleach or dye on the
cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to CAUTION
belts. They may weaken the fabric in the
loosen dirt. belts. It is important that your vehicle be
Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth to kept clean and free from dirt. Failure
remove dirt and the soap solution. If some Vinyl floor mats to keep your vehicle clean may result
dirt still remains on the surface, repeat this Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl in fading of the paint or corrosion to
procedure. with water or mild soap. Use a brush to various parts of the vehicle body.
help loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,
Fabric upholstery rinse the mat thoroughly with water and Washing
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. dry it in the shade.
Using a mild soap solution, rub stained WARNING
areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove Carpets
soap, rub the areas again with a cloth • Never attempt to wash and wax
Remove dirt and soil as much as possible your vehicle with the engine run-
dampened with water. Repeat this until the with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap
stain is removed, or use a commercial fab- ning.
solution, rub stained areas with a clean • When cleaning the underside of the
ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas
fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manufac- body and fender, where there may
again with a cloth dampened with water. be sharp-edged parts, you should
turer’s instructions and precautions. Repeat this until the stain is removed, or wear gloves and a long sleeved
use a commercial carpet cleaner for shirt to protect your hands and
Leather upholstery tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. arms from being cut.
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc- • After washing your vehicle, care-
Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution, tions and precautions.
wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth. fully test the brakes before driving
To remove soap, wipe the areas again with to make sure they have maintained
Instrument panel and console their normal effectiveness.
a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the NOTE:
areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this Wipe up spills containing chemicals, alco-
until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a hol, etc., immediately with a soft, damp
commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt cloth. Use a mild soap solution if neces-
or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, care- sary. Do not use cleaners or polishes con-
fully follow the manufacture’s instructions taining strong solvents or acidic solutions.
9-3
78KS0-37E

Vehicle Cleaning: 5
APPEARANCE CARE
When washing the vehicle, park it where sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or Waxing
direct sunlight does not fall on it and follow cloth should be frequently soaked in the
the instructions below: soap solution.
1) Flush the underside of body and wheel
housings with pressurized water to CAUTION
remove mud and debris. Use plenty of
water. When using a commercial car wash
product, observe the cautions speci-
fied by the manufacturer. Never use
CAUTION strong household detergents or
• When washing the vehicle, avoid soaps.
directing steam or hot water of
more than 80°C (176°F) on plastic 4) Once the dirt has been completely
parts. removed, rinse off the detergent with
• To avoid damaging engine compo- running water.
nents, do not use pressurized 5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle body 60B211S
water in the engine compartment. with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it
to dry in the shade. After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-
2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt. 6) Check carefully for damage to painted ishing are recommended to further protect
Remove dirt and mud from the body surfaces. If there is any damage, and beautify the paint.
exterior with running water. You may “touch-up” the damage following the • Only use waxes and polishes of good
use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use procedure below: quality.
hard materials which can scratch the 1. Clean all damaged spots and allow • When using waxes and polishes,
paint or plastic. Remember that the them to dry. observe the precautions specified by the
headlight covers or lenses are made of 2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” the manufacturers.
plastic in many cases. damaged spots lightly using a small
brush.
CAUTION 3. Allow the paint to dry completely.
To avoid damage to the paint or plas-
tic surface, do not wipe the dirt off
without ample water. Be sure to fol-
low above procedure.
3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild

detergent or car wash soap using a
9-4
78KS0-37E

APPEARANCE CARE
MEMO
9-5
78KS0-37E

GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification .......................................................... 10-1
54G072
10
78KS0-37E

Vehicle Identification: 2, 5
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification The chassis and/or engine serial numbers 3.2 L engine model
are used to register the vehicle. They are
Chassis Serial Number also used to assist your dealer when order-
ing or referring to special service informa-
tion. Whenever you have occasion to
consult your SUZUKI dealer, remember to
identify your vehicle with this number.
Should you find the number difficult to
read, you will also find it on the identifica-
tion plate.
Engine Serial Number

2.0 L engine model
79K060
The engine serial number is stamped on

64J197 the cylinder block as shown in the illustra-
tion.
EXAMPLE (for some vehicles)
60G128
60G152
10-1
78KS0-37E

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Specifications are subject to change with- 4WD: 4-weel drive M/T: Manual transmission
out notice. 2WD: 2-weel drive A/T: Automatic transmission
ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm (in.)

Overall length 4475 – 4500 (176.2 – 177.2)
Overall width 1810 (71.3)
Overall height 4WD 1695 (66.7)
2WD 1683 (66.3)
Wheelbase 2640 (103.9)
Track front 1540 (60.6)
rear 1570 (61.8)
Ground clearance 4WD 200 (7.9)
2WD 188 (7.4)
ITEM: Mass (weight) UNIT: kg (lbs) GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL DIESEL ENGINE MODEL
Curb mass (weight) 1580 – 1753 (3483 – 3865) 1630 – 1660 (3593 – 3660)
Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating 2100 – 2170 (4630 – 4784) 2170 (4784)
Gross axle mass (weight) rating front 1050 (2315) 1050 (2315) 11
rear 1210 (2668) 1210 (2668)
11-1
78KS0-37E

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Engine 2.0 L 3.2 L 1.9 L

Type J20A (16V DOHC) N32A (24V DOHC) F9Q
Number of cylinders 4 6 4
Bore 84.0 mm (3.31 in.) 89.0 mm (3.50 in.) 80.0 mm (3.15 in.)
Stroke 90.0 mm (3.54 in.) 85.6 mm (3.37 in.) 93.0 mm (3.66 in.)
Piston displacement 1995 cm3 (1995 cc, 3195 cm3 (3195 cc, 1870 cm3 (1870 cc,
121.7 cu.in) 194.9 cu.in) 114.1 cu.in)
Compression ratio Engine for regular gasoline 9.5 : 1 10.0 : 1 –
Diesel engine – – 17 : 1
ITEM : Electrical
Standard spark plug Iridium plug 2.0 L NGK IFR5J11 (highly recommended)
(If the iridium plugs are available they can be used.)
Platinum plug 3.2 L AC DELCO 41-990 (highly recommended)
Nickel plug 2.0 L NGK BKR6E-11
Battery 12V 55D23L 48AH/5HR
2.0 L
(or 75D23L 52AH/5HR for freezing area)
12V 55D23L 48AH/5HR
3.2 L
(or 75D23L 52AH/5HR or 95D26L 66AH/5HR for freezing area)
1.9 L Diesel 12V 95D26L
Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.
11-2
78KS0-37E

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No.

Headlight Low beam Halogen 12V 55W H7
Discharge 12V 35W D2S
High beam 12V 60W HB3
Front fog light 12V 55W H11
Turn signal light front 12V 21W WY21W
rear 12V 21W WY21W
Side turn signal light 12V 5W WY5W
Parking light 12V 5W W5W
Brake/tail light 12V 21/5W W21/5W
License plate light 12V 5W W5W
Reversing light 12V 21W W21W
Rear fog light 12V 21W W21W
High mount stop light 12V 5W W5W
Door illumination light 12V 5W –
Dome light Spot light 12V 8W –
Center light 12V 10W –
Rear light 12V 10W –
Luggage compartment light 12V 5W W5W
11-3
78KS0-37E

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Wheel and Suspension

Tire size, front and rear 225/70R16, 225/65R17, 225/60R18
Rim size 225/70R16 tire: 16 x 6 1/2J (steel & aluminum)
225/65R17 tire: 17 x 6 1/2J (aluminum)
225/60R18: 18 x 7J (aluminum)
Tire pressures For the specified tire pressure under the normal condition, see the Tire Informa-
tion Label located on the driver’s door lock pillar.
If towing a trailer, use the following value:
front 240 kPa (2.40 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
rear 280 kPa (2.80 kg/cm2, 40 psi)
Recommended snow chain (for Europe) 225/70R16, 225/65R17:
43390-65J00 (SUZUKI P/NO.)
or radial thickness: 15 mm (max.), axial thickness: 15 mm (max.)
225/60R18:
radial thickness: 15 mm (max.), axial thickness: 15 mm (max.)
ITEM: Steering
Toe-in front 0 ± 2 mm (0 ± 0.08 in.)
rear 6 ± 2 mm (0.24 ± 0.08 in.)
Camber angle front 0° 00’
rear –1° 15’ ± 40’
Caster angle front 2° 30’
11-4
78KS0-37E

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Capacities (approx.) GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL

Coolant (including reservoir tank) 2.0 L 7.3 L (12.8 Imp pt)
3.2 L 9.5 L (16.7 Imp pt)
Fuel tank 66 L (14.5 Imp gal)
Engine oil (replacement with oil filter) 2.0 L 4.7 L (8.3 Imp pt)
3.2 L 6.0 L (10.6 Imp pt)
Transmission oil M/T 1.9 L (3.3 Imp pt)
4A/T 2.5 L (4.4 Imp pt) (when drained)
5A/T 3.0 L (5.3 Imp pt) (when drained)
Differential gear oil front 0.95 L (1.7 Imp pt)
2WD 0.9 L (1.6 Imp pt)
rear
4WD 0.8 L (1.4 Imp pt)
Transfer oil with a transfer switch 1.5 L (2.6 Imp pt)
without a transfer switch 1.6 L (2.8 Imp pt)
Extension case oil 0.47 L (1.0 US pt)
11-5
78KS0-37E

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Capacities (approx.) DIESEL ENGINE MODEL

Coolant (including degassing tank) 1.9 L 8.5 L (15.0 Imp pt)
Fuel tank 5 door 66 L (14.5 Imp gal)
Engine oil (replacement with oil filter) 1.9 L 5.1 L (9.0 Imp pt)
Transmission oil M/T 1.9 L (3.3 Imp pt)
Differential gear oil front 0.95 L (1.7 Imp pt)
rear 0.8 L (1.4 Imp pt)
Transfer oil 1.5 L (2.6 Imp pt)
NOTE:
Fluids and oils being refilled should finally be adjusted with each level gauge and so forth. The data listed should be used as a guide to
determine first pour amount. They can be somewhat different from the ones of actual vehicle or the ones in other issues depending on
information source or issue timing.
11-6
78KS0-37E

INDEX
INDEX
Symbols Assist Grips ......................................................................... 5-57
“AIR BAG” Light ..................................................................2-48 Audio Systems (type A) ...................................................... 5-8
“CRUISE” Indicator Light ...................................................2-51 Audio Systems (type B) ...................................................... 5-32
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light ........................................ 2-47, 3-35 Automatic Headlight Leveling System Warning Light .... 2-52
“ESP” (Electronic Stability Program) Warning Light .......2-46 Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System
“ESP” Warning Light ...........................................................3-34 (Climate Control) ................................................................. 5-1
“POWER” Indicator Light ...................................................2-51 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .................................. 2-24
“SET” Indicator Light ..........................................................2-51 Automatic Transmission (AT) Fluid .................................. 7-21
Numerics Average Speed .................................................................... 2-57
4-Speed Automatic Transmission ......................................3-15 B
4WD Mode Indicator Lights ................................................2-53 Basic Operations ................................................................ 5-11
5-Speed Automatic Transmission ......................................3-13 Battery .................................................................................. 7-28
A Brake Assist System .......................................................... 3-31
A/T Selector Position ..........................................................2-57 Brake Fluid .......................................................................... 7-23
Accelerator Pedal ................................................................3-9 Brake Pedal ..................................................................3-9, 7-23
Accessory Socket ................................................................5-53 Brake System Warning Light ............................................. 2-45
Adding ..................................................................................7-13 Brakes .................................................................................. 7-23
Adding Coolant ....................................................................7-13 Braking ................................................................................. 3-30
Adjustable Head Restraints ...................................... 2-16, 2-19 Break-In ................................................................................ 4-2
Adjusting Seat Position ......................................................2-15 Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-34
Adjusting Seatbacks ................................................. 2-16, 2-18 C
Air Cleaner ...........................................................................7-15 Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-3 12
Air Conditioning System .....................................................7-45 CD Changer ......................................................................... 5-40
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..........................................3-31 CD Player ............................................................................. 5-39
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .................2-45 Central Door Locking System ............................................ 2-3
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) .......................................3-33 Changing Engine Oil and Filter ......................................... 7-9
Anti-Theft System (SEC) .....................................................5-43 Changing Wheels ................................................................ 8-3
Armrest .................................................................................5-61 Charging Light .................................................................... 2-48
12-1
78KS0-37E

INDEX
Chassis Serial Number .......................................................10-1 Engine Oil Consumption .................................................... 3-3

Child Restraint Systems .....................................................2-27 Engine Serial Number ......................................................... 10-1
Child-Proof Locks (rear side door) ....................................2-4 Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray ............................................5-54 Extension Case Oil ............................................................. 7-18
Clutch Pedal ................................................................. 3-9, 7-21 Eyeglasses Holder .............................................................. 5-58
Coat Hooks ...........................................................................5-58 F
Coolant Level Check ...........................................................7-13 Fluid Level Check ............................................................... 7-21
Coolant Replacement ..........................................................7-14 Folding Rear Seats ............................................................. 2-20
Corrosion Prevention ..........................................................9-1 Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-67
Cruise Control ......................................................................3-29 Front Air Bags ..................................................................... 2-38
Cup Holder and Storage Bin ...............................................5-59 Front Fog Light Switch ....................................................... 2-64
D Front Seat Back Pocket ...................................................... 5-60
Daily Inspection Checklist ..................................................3-2 Front Seat Heater ................................................................ 2-17
Diesel Engine .......................................................................1-1 Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-15
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®) ..........................................3-11 Fuel Consumption .............................................................. 2-57
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®) Warning Light Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-49
(For Diesel Engine Model) ..................................................2-51 Fuel Filter (Diesel engine) .................................................. 7-22
Differential Oil ......................................................................7-18 Fuel Filter Warning Light (For Diesel Engine Model) ...... 2-50
Door Locks ...........................................................................2-2 Fuel Gauge .......................................................................... 2-54
Drive Belt ..............................................................................7-7 Fuel Recommendation ....................................................... 1-1
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder ...............................................2-26 Fuse under the Dash Board ............................................... 7-32
Driving range .......................................................................2-57 Fuses .................................................................................... 7-29
E Fuses in the Engine Compartment .................................... 7-30
Electric Mirrors ....................................................................2-14 G
Electric Window Controls ...................................................2-12 Gasoline Engine .................................................................. 1-1
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) .................................3-33 Gasoline/Ethanol blends .................................................... 1-1
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .................................2-24 Gasoline/Methanol blends ................................................. 1-1
Emergency Remedies .........................................................8-10 Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-18
Engine Coolant ....................................................................7-12 Gear Oil Change .................................................................. 7-20
Engine Hood ........................................................................5-50 Gear Oil Level Check .......................................................... 7-20
Engine Oil and Filter ............................................................7-8 Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-58
12-2
78KS0-37E

INDEX
Glow Plug Indicator Light (For Diesel Engine Model) ......2-50 Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts ........................ 2-29
H Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-44
Hazard Warning Switch .......................................................2-66 Instrument Panel ................................................................. 2-44
Head Light Washer Fluid ....................................................7-34 Interior Light Switch ........................................................... 5-51
Head Light Washer Switch .................................................2-65 J
Headlight Aiming .................................................................7-34 Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-2
Headlight Leveling Switch ..................................................2-64 Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-7
Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview K
Mirrors Switch ......................................................................2-69 Keyless Entry System Transmitter .................................... 2-10
Hill descent control Indicator Light ...................................2-47 Keyless Start System Indicator Light ............................... 2-52
Hill descent control System ...............................................3-36 Keyless Start System Remote Controller ......................... 2-5
Hill hold control System .....................................................3-38 Keyless Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry
Horn ......................................................................................2-69 System Transmitter ............................................................ 2-5
How the ABS Works ............................................................3-32 Keys ..................................................................................... 2-1
I L
If You Can Not Shift Automatic Transmission Gearshift Lap-Shoulder Belt ............................................................... 2-24
Lever Out of “P” (PARK) .....................................................3-18 Lighting Control Lever ....................................................... 2-63
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ..................................................4-7 Lighting Operation .............................................................. 2-63
Ignition Key Reminder ........................................................2-2 Lights “On” reminder ......................................................... 2-64
Ignition Switch .....................................................................3-3 Listening to a CD ................................................................ 5-15
Illumination Control .............................................................2-55 Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer
Illumination Indicator Light ................................................2-53 (Option) ................................................................................ 5-24
Immobilizer System .............................................................2-1 Listening to the Radio ........................................................ 5-13
Immobilizer System Light ...................................................2-49 Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................................... 2-49
Important Vehicle Design Features to Know ....................4-1 Luggage Compartment Cover ........................................... 5-62
Improving Fuel Economy ....................................................4-4 Luggage Compartment Light ............................................. 5-52
Information Display .............................................................2-56 Luggage Restraint Loops ................................................... 5-65
Injection Warning Light (For Diesel Engine Model) .........2-50 M
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................................................2-13 Main Beam (high beam) Indicator Light ............................ 2-52
Installation of Child Restraint with Top Strap ...................2-34 Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving
Installation with ISO-FIX Type Anchorages ......................2-32 Conditions ........................................................................... 7-5
12-3
78KS0-37E

INDEX
Maintenance Schedule ........................................................7-2 Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks ................................... 7-12
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................................2-49 Refilling ................................................................................ 7-9
Manual Transmission ..........................................................3-12 Remote Audio Controls .............................................5-26, 5-47
Manual Transmission Oil ....................................................7-18 Replace the Oil Filter .......................................................... 7-11
Mirrors ..................................................................................2-13 Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors ..................................... 5-66
MP3/WMA Player .................................................................5-41 S
O Seat Adjustment .........................................................2-15, 2-18
Odometer ..............................................................................2-59 Seat Belt Inspection ............................................................ 2-27
Off-Road Driving ..................................................................4-6 Seat Belt Pretensioner System .......................................... 2-35
Oil Level Check ....................................................................7-8 Seat Belt Reminder Light ................................................... 2-48
Oil Pressure Light ................................................................2-48 Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-22
On-Paved Road Driving ......................................................4-4 Selection of Coolant ........................................................... 7-13
Open Door Warning Light ...................................................2-51 Shopping Hook ................................................................... 5-61
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................................................2-14 Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster ..................................... 2-27
P Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags ......................... 2-40
Parking Brake ......................................................................7-24 Side Door Locks .................................................................. 2-2
Parking Brake Lever ............................................................3-7 SLIP Indicator Light ...................................................2-46, 3-34
Pedal .....................................................................................3-9 Spare Tire Nut Lock ............................................................ 8-1
Periodic Maintenance Schedule .........................................7-2 Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 7-16
Power Assisted Brakes .......................................................3-31 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 11-1
Power Steering ....................................................................7-25 Specified Fluid .................................................................... 7-21
Power Steering Fluid ...........................................................7-25 Specified Oil ........................................................................ 7-8
R Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-54
Radio .....................................................................................5-36 Spot Light (for 5 door model) ............................................ 5-53
Radio Antenna ............................................................. 5-8, 5-34 Stability Control System .................................................... 3-33
RDS (Radio Data System) ...................................................5-37 Starting the Engine ............................................................. 3-10
Rear Door .............................................................................2-4 Steering ................................................................................ 7-25
Rear Fog Light Indicator Light ...........................................2-53 Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-51
Rear Seats ............................................................................2-18 Sunroof ................................................................................ 5-55
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch ..................................2-68 Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-36
Red Stop Warning Light (For Diesel Engine Model) ........2-50
12-4
78KS0-37E

INDEX
T Vehicle Loading .................................................................. 6-1

Tachometer ..........................................................................2-54 Vehicle With Keyless Start System ................................... 3-5
Temperature Gauge .............................................................2-55 Vehicle Without Keyless Start System ............................. 3-4
Theft Deterrent Light ...........................................................2-11 W
Thermometer ........................................................................2-59 Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-45
Tilt Steering Lock Lever ......................................................2-68 Warning and Indicator Messages ...................................... 2-60
Tire Chains ...........................................................................4-6 Washing ............................................................................... 9-3
Tire Changing Tool ..............................................................8-1 Waxing ................................................................................. 9-4
Tire Inspection .....................................................................7-26 Windows .............................................................................. 2-12
Tire Rotation ........................................................................7-27 Windshield Washer ............................................................. 2-67
Tires ......................................................................................7-25 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-45
Towing ..................................................................................8-9 Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-66
Towing capacity ...................................................................6-1 Windshield Wipers .............................................................. 2-67
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) .......................6-6 Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-41
Traction Control System .....................................................3-33
Trailer hitch installation points ..........................................6-5
Trailer Towing ......................................................................6-1
Transfer Oil ..........................................................................7-18
Transmission Warning Light ..............................................2-52
Trip meter .............................................................................2-59
Troubleshooting ..................................................................5-30
Turn Signal Control Lever ..................................................2-65
Turn Signal Indicators .........................................................2-52
Turn Signal Operation .........................................................2-66
U
Underfloor Bins ...................................................................5-65
Using the Transfer Switch ..................................................3-18
Using the Transmission ......................................................3-12
V
Vehicle Cleaning ..................................................................9-2
Vehicle Identification ...........................................................10-1
12-5
78KS0-37E

INDEX
MEMO
12-6
78KS0-37E

78KS0-37E

78KS0-37E

DECLARATION of CONFORMITY
We, Calsonic Kansei Corp. hereby declare, at our sole responsibility, that the following product conforms to the Essential Requirements
of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC in accordance with the tests conducted to the appropri-
ate requirements of the relevant standards, as listed herewith.
Product: Controller of Intelligent Key System (Keyless Start System)
Model/ Type Number: S62J1
Year of affixing CE marking: 2004
78KS0-37E

Product: Key of Intelligent Key System (Keyless Start System)
Model/ Type Number: TS001
78KS0-37E

Product: Transmitter of Keyless Entry System
Model/ Type Number: TS002
78KS0-37E

We, Calsonic Kansei Corp. hereby declare, at our sole responsibility, that the following product conforms to the Essential Require-
ments of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC in accordance with the tests conducted to the
appropriate requirements of the relevant standards, as listed herewith.
Product: Receiver of Keyless Entry System
Model/ Type Number: R62J1
78KS0-37E

We, Calsonic Kansei Corp. of the above address, hereby declare, at our sole responsibility, that the following product conforms to the
Essential Requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC in accordance with the tests
conducted to the appropriate requirements of the relevant standards, as listed herewith.
Product: Receiver of Keyless Entry System
Model/ Type Number: R51K0
78KS0-37E

MEMO
78KS0-37E

Grand Vitara 2008

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grand Vitara 2008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGLISH 13.

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

Engine oil recommendation: Automatic transmission fluid:

For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the

Contains Important Information

Part No. 99011-78KS0-37E

Suzuki Red: PANTONE 485

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE: The illustrated model is one of the GRAND VITARA series.

© COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2008

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Non-Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

Re-use of Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LHD: Left Hand Drive

NOTE: The illustration is 5 DOOR model.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INSTRUMENT PANEL EXAMPLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INSTRUMENT PANEL EXAMPLE 1 2 3 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fuel Recommendation Gasoline/Ethanol blends Diesel Engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If the immobilizer system light (1) or the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

electronic instrument. To avoid dam-

This immobilizer system, model

To unlock a front door from outside the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You can also lock or unlock all doors by

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keyless Start System Remote Keyless Start System Remote

Your vehicle is equipped with either a key- (2)

(1) “LOCK” button

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Replacement of the battery

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keyless Entry System Transmitter When the doors are unlocked:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2) Remove the transmitter (2). Theft Deterrent Light

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Windows Passenger’s door

Electric Window Controls EXAMPLE CLOSE

Driver’s side OPEN